Class 12 - Physics

Chapter One
ELECTRIC CHARGES
AND FIELDS
d
he
pu T
is
re ER
bl
be C
o N
MCQ I
tt ©
1.1 In Fig.1.1, two positive charges q2 and q3 fixed along the y axis,
exert a net electric force in the + x direction on a charge q1 fixed
along the x axis. If a positive charge Q is added at (x, 0),
the force on q1
y y
q2 q2
no
Q
x x
q1 O q1 O (x, 0)
q3 q3
(a) (b)
Fig. 1.1
Exemplar Problems–Physics
(a) shall increase along the positive x-axis.

(b) shall decrease along the positive x-axis.
(c) shall point along the negative x-axis.
(d) shall increase but the direction changes because of the
intersection of Q with q2 and q3.
1.2 A point positive charge is brought near an isolated conducting
sphere (Fig. 1.2). The electric field is best given by
d
he
+q +q
pu T (i) (ii)
is
re ER
+q
bl +q
be C
(iii) (iv)
o N
Fig. 1.2
(a) Fig (i) (c) Fig (iii)
(b) Fig (ii) (d) Fig (iv)
tt ©
1.3 The Electric flux through the surface

(a) in Fig.1.3 (iv) is the largest.
(b) in Fig. 1.3 (iii) is the least.
(c) in Fig. 1.3 (ii) is same as Fig. 1.3 (iii) but is smaller than Fig. 1.3 (iv)
(d) is the same for all the figures.
S
S
S S
no
+q +q +q
+q
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
Fig. 1.3
2
Electric Charges and Fields
1.4 Five charges q1, q2, q3, q4, and q5 are fixed at their positions as shown
in Fig. 1.4. S is a Gaussian surface. The Gauss’s law is given by Gaussian Surface
q
∫ E.ds = ε 0 q1
S
S
q2
Which of the following statements is correct?
(a) E on the LHS of the above equation will have a contribution
q4
from q1, q5 and q3 while q on the RHS will have a contribution
from q2 and q4 only. q5 q3
d
(b) E on the LHS of the above equation will have a contribution
from all charges while q on the RHS will have a contribution
he
from q2 and q4 only. Fig. 1.4
(c) E on the LHS of the above equation will have a contribution
from all charges while q on the RHS will have a contribution
pu T
is
from q1, q3 and q5 only.
(d) Both E on the LHS and q on the RHS will have contributions
re ER
from q2 and q4 only.
1.5
bl
Figure 1.5 shows electric field lines in which an electric dipole p is
placed as shown. Which of the following statements is correct?
be C
(a) The dipole will not experience any force.

(b) The dipole will experience a force towards right.
(c) The dipole will experience a force towards left.
o N
(d) The dipole will experience a force upwards.

1.6 A point charge +q, is placed at a distance d from an p
–q +q
tt ©
isolated conducting plane. The field at a point P on the

other side of the plane is
(a) directed perpendicular to the plane and away from
the plane.
Fig. 1.5
(b) directed perpendicular to the plane but towards the plane.
(c) directed radially away from the point charge.
(d) directed radially towards the point charge.
1.7 A hemisphere is uniformely charged positively. The electric field at
a point on a diameter away from the centre is directed
no
(a) perpendicular to the diameter

(b) parallel to the diameter
(c) at an angle tilted towards the diameter
(d) at an angle tilted away from the diameter.
3
MCQ II
1.8 If ∫ s E.dS = 0 over a surface, then
(a) the electric field inside the surface and on it is zero.
(b) the electric field inside the surface is necessarily uniform.
(c) the number of flux lines entering the surface must be equal to
the number of flux lines leaving it.
d
(d) all charges must necessarily be outside the surface.
1.9 The Electric field at a point is
he
(a) always continuous.
(b) continuous if there is no charge at that point.
pu T (c) discontinuous only if there is a negative charge at that point.
is
(d) discontinuous if there is a charge at that point..
re ER
bl
1.10 If there were only one type of charge in the universe, then
(a) ∫ s E.dS ≠ 0 on any surface.
∫ s E.dS = 0
be C
(b) if the charge is outside the surface.
(c) ∫ s E.dS could not be defined.

o N
q
(d) ∫ s E.dS = ε 0 if charges of magnitude q were inside the surface.
tt ©
1.11 Consider a region inside which there are various types of charges
but the total charge is zero. At points outside the region
(a) the electric field is necessarily zero.
(b) the electric field is due to the dipole moment of the charge
distribution only.
(c) the dominant electric field is ∝ 1 , for large r, where r is the

r3
distance from a origin in this region.
Gaussian surface (d) the work done to move a charged particle along a closed path,
away from the region, will be zero.
no
1.12 Refer to the arrangement of charges in Fig. 1.6 and a Gaussian

surface of radius R with Q at the centre. Then
R Q R
5Q R/2
(a) total flux through the surface of the sphere is –Q .
–2Q ε0
–Q
Fig. 1.6 (b) field on the surface of the sphere is 4πε R 2 .
0
4
(c) flux through the surface of sphere due to 5Q is zero.

(d) field on the surface of sphere due to –2Q is same everywhere.
1.13 A positive charge Q is uniformly distributed along a circular
ring of radius R. A small test charge q is placed at the centre of + + Q
the ring (Fig. 1.7). Then
(a) If q > 0 and is displaced away from the centre in the plane
of the ring, it will be pushed back towards the centre.
(b) If q < 0 and is displaced away from the centre in the plane q
d
of the ring, it will never return to the centre and will R
continue moving till it hits the ring. z
he
(c) If q < 0, it will perform SHM for small displacement along
the axis.
(d) q at the centre of the ring is in an unstable equilibrium
pu T
within the plane of the ring for q > 0. Fig. 1.7
is
re ER
VSA
1.14
bl
An arbitrary surface encloses a dipole. What is the electric flux
through this surface?
be C
1.15 A metallic spherical shell has an inner radius R1 and outer radius
R2. A charge Q is placed at the centre of the spherical cavity. What
will be surface charge density on (i) the inner surface, and (ii) the
o N
outer surface?
1.16 The dimensions of an atom are of the order of an Angstrom. Thus

tt ©
there must be large electric fields between the protons and electrons.
Why, then is the electrostatic field inside a conductor zero?
1.17 If the total charge enclosed by a surface is zero, does it imply that
the elecric field everywhere on the surface is zero? Conversely, if
the electric field everywhere on a surface is zero, does it imply that
net charge inside is zero.
1.18 Sketch the electric field lines for a uniformly charged hollow
cylinder shown in Fig 1.8.
no
++++
++++++++
++++++++
++++
Fig. 1.8
5
1.19 What will be the total flux through the faces of the cube (Fig. 1.9)
with side of length a if a charge q is placed at
(a) A: a corner of the cube.
(b) B: mid-point of an edge of the cube.
C (c) C: centre of a face of the cube.
(d) D: mid-point of B and C.
D
S.A
B
d
A 1.20 A paisa coin is made up of Al-Mg alloy and weighs 0.75g. It has a
he
square shape and its diagonal measures 17 mm. It is electrically
Fig. 1.9
neutral and contains equal amounts of positive and negative
charges.
pu T Treating the paisa coins made up of only Al, find the magnitude of
is
equal number of positive and negative charges. What conclusion
re ER
do you draw from this magnitude?
bl 1.21 Consider a coin of Example 1.20. It is electrically neutral and

contains equal amounts of positive and negative charge of
magnitude 34.8 kC. Suppose that these equal charges were
be C
concentrated in two point charges seperated by (i) 1 cm

⎛ 1 ⎞
⎜ ~ × diagonal of the one paisa coin ⎟ , (ii) 100 m (~ length of a long
o N
⎝ 2 ⎠
building), and (iii) 106 m (radius of the earth). Find the force on
each such point charge in each of the three cases. What do you
tt ©
conclude from these results?
1.22 Fig. 1.10 represents a crystal unit of cesium chloride, CsCl. The
cesium atoms, represented by open circles are situated at the
corners of a cube of side 0.40nm, whereas a Cl atom is situated at
the centre of the cube. The Cs atoms are deficient in one electron
while the Cl atom carries an excess electron.
(i) What is the net electric field on the Cl atom due to eight Cs
atoms?
A (ii) Suppose that the Cs atom at the corner A is missing. What is
the net force now on the Cl atom due to seven remaining Cs
no
atoms?
0.40 nm
+ – 1.23 Two charges q and –3q are placed fixed on x-axis separated by
Cs Cl
distance ‘d’. Where should a third charge 2q be placed such that
Fig. 1.10 it will not experience any force?
6
1.24 Fig. 1.11 shows the electric field lines around three point charges
A, B and C.
A
C
d
Fig. 1.11
he
(a) Which charges are positive?
pu T
(b) Which charge has the largest magnitude? Why?
is
(c) In which region or regions of the picture could the electric field
re ER
be zero? Justify your answer.
bl
(i) near A, (ii) near B, (iii) near C, (iv) nowhere.
1.25 Five charges, q each are placed at the corners of a regular pentagon Aq
of side ‘a’ (Fig. 1.12).
be C
(a) (i) What will be the electric field at O, the centre of the E B
o N
pentagon? q q
O
(ii) What will be the electric field at O if the charge from one of
the corners (say A) is removed?
r
tt ©
(iii) What will be the electric field at O if the charge q at A is

replaced by –q? Dq qC
a
(b) How would your answer to (a) be affected if pentagon is replaced
by n-sided regular polygon with charge q at each of its corners? Fig. 1.12
LA
1.26 In 1959 Lyttleton and Bondi suggested that the expansion of the
Universe could be explained if matter carried a net charge.
Suppose that the Universe is made up of hydrogen atoms with a
number density N, which is maintained a constant. Let the charge
no
on the proton be: ep = – (1 + y)e where e is the electronic charge.

(a) Find the critical value of y such that expansion may start.
(b) Show that the velocity of expansion is proportional to the
distance from the centre.
7
1.27 Consider a sphere of radius R with charge density distributed as

ρ (r ) = kr for r ≤ R
=0 for r > R .
(a) Find the electric field at all points r.
(b) Suppose the total charge on the sphere is 2e where e is the
electron charge. Where can two protons be embedded such
that the force on each of them is zero. Assume that the
y introduction of the proton does not alter the negative charge
d
distribution.
he
x 1.28 Two fixed, identical conducting plates (α & β ) , each of surface
area S are charged to –Q and q, respectively, where Q > q > 0. A
b g
a third identical plate (γ ), free to move is located on the other side of
pu T
is
the plate with charge q at a distance d (Fig 1.13). The third plate
is released and collides with the plate β . Assume the collision is
re ER
elastic and the time of collision is sufficient to redistribute charge
bl amongst β & γ .
(a) Find the electric field acting on the plate γ before collision.
be C
d (b) Find the charges on β and γ after the collision.

-Q q Q
(c) Find the velocity of the plate γ after the collision and at a distance
d from the plate β.
o N
Fig. 1.13
1.29 There is another useful system of units, besides the SI/mks A
system, called the cgs (centimeter-gram-second) system. In this
system Coloumb’s law is given by
tt ©
Qq
F= rˆ
r2
where the distance r is measured in cm (= 10–2 m), F in dynes
(=10–5 N) and the charges in electrostatic units (es units), where
1
1es unit of charge = × 10 –9 C
[3]
The number [3] actually arises from the speed of light in vaccum
no
which is now taken to be exactly given by c = 2.99792458 × 108

m/s. An approximate value of c then is c = [3] × 108 m/s.
(i) Show that the coloumb law in cgs units yields
1 esu of charge = 1 (dyne)1/2 cm.
Obtain the dimensions of units of charge in terms of mass M,
length L and time T. Show that it is given in terms of fractional
powers of M and L.
8
(ii) Write 1 esu of charge = x C, where x is a dimensionless number.

Show that this gives
1 10 –9 N.m 2
= 2
4π ∈0 x C2
1
With x = × 10 –9 , we have
[3]
d
1 Nm 2
= [3]2 × 109
4π ∈0 C2
he
1 Nm 2
or, = (2.99792458)2 × 109 (exactly).
pu T
4π ∈0 C2
is
re ER
q
1.30 Two charges –q each are fixed separated by distance 2d. A third
bl
charge q of mass m placed at the mid-point is displaced slightly
by x (x<<d) perpendicular to the line joining the two fixed charged
as shown in Fig. 1.14. Show that q will perform simple harmonic – q d
q x
d –q
be C
oscillation of time period. Fig. 1.14

1/ 2
⎡ 8π 3ε 0md 3 ⎤
T =⎢ ⎥
o N
⎣ q2 ⎦
1.31 Total charge –Q is uniformly spread along length of a ring of

tt ©
radius R. A small test charge +q of mass m is kept at the centre

of the ring and is given a gentle push along the axis of the ring.
(a) Show that the particle executes a simple harmonic oscillation.

(b) Obtain its time period.
no
9
Chapter Two
ELECTROSTATIC
POTENTIAL AND
d
he
CAPACITANCE pu T
is
re ER
bl
be C
o N
MCQ I
tt ©
2.1 A capacitor of 4 μ F is connected as shown in the circuit (Fig. 2.1).

The internal resistance of the battery is 0.5 Ω . The amount of charge 4mF
on the capacitor plates will be 10W
(a) 0
(b) 4μC
2.5V
(c) 16 μ C
(d) 8μC 2W
Fig. 2.1
2.2 A positively charged particle is released from rest in an uniform
no
electric field. The electric potential energy of the charge

(a) remains a constant because the electric field is uniform.
(b) increases because the charge moves along the electric field.
(c) decreases because the charge moves along the electric field.
(d) decreases because the charge moves opposite to the electric field.
Electrostatic Potential
and Capacitance
2.3 Figure 2.2 shows some equipotential lines distributed in space.

A charged object is moved from point A to point B.
30V 40V 30V
A B A B A B
d
he
pu T
is
10V 20V 30V 40V 50V 10V 20V 50V 10V 20V 40V 50V
re ER
Fig I Fig II Fig III
(a)
(i)
bl (ii)
Fig. 2.2
The work done in Fig. (i) is the greatest.
(iii)
be C
(b) The work done in Fig. (ii) is least.

(c) The work done is the same in Fig. (i), Fig. (ii) and Fig. (iii).
o N
(d) The work done in Fig. (iii) is greater than Fig. (ii)but equal to
that in Fig. (i).
2.4 The electrostatic potential on the surface of a charged conducting
tt ©
sphere is 100V. Two statments are made in this regard:

S1 : At any point inside the sphere, electric intensity is zero.
S2 : At any point inside the sphere, the electrostatic potential is
100V.
Which of the following is a correct statement?
(a) S1 is true but S2 is false.
(b) Both S1 & S2 are false.
(c) S1 is true, S2 is also true and S1 is the cause of S2.
(d) S1 is true, S2 is also true but the statements are independant.
no
2.5 Equipotentials at a great distance from a collection of charges whose

total sum is not zero are approximately
(a) spheres.
(b) planes.
(c) paraboloids
(d) ellipsoids.
11
2.6 A parallel plate capacitor is made of two dielectric blocks in series.

One of the blocks has thickness d1 and dielectric constant k1 and
the other has thickness d2 and dielectric constant k2 as shown in
d1 k1 Fig. 2.3. This arrangement can be thought as a dielectric slab of
thickness d (= d1+d2) and effective dielectric constant k. The k is
d1 k2
k1d1 + k 2d 2 k d + k 2d 2 k k (d + d 2 ) 2k1k 2
Fig. 2.3 (a) (b ) 1 1 (c ) 1 2 1 (d )
d1 + d 2 k1 + k 2 (k1d1 + k 2d 2 ) k1 + k 2
d
MCQ II
he
2.7 Consider a uniform electric field in the ẑ direction. The potential is
a constant
pu T (a) in all space.
is
(b) for any x for a given z.
re ER
(c) for any y for a given z.
bl
(d) on the x-y plane for a given z.
2.8 Equipotential surfaces
(a) are closer in regions of large electric fields compared to regions
be C
of lower electric fields.

(b) will be more crowded near sharp edges of a conductor.
o N
(c) will be more crowded near regions of large charge densities.

(d) will always be equally spaced.
2.9 The work done to move a charge along an equipotential from A to B
tt ©
B
(a) cannot be defined as – ∫ E . d l
A
B
(b) must be defined as – ∫ E . d l
A
(c) is zero.
(d) can have a non-zero value.
2.10 In a region of constant potential
(a) the electric field is uniform
no
(b) the electric field is zero

(c) there can be no charge inside the region.
(d) the electric field shall necessarily change if a charge is placed
outside the region.
2.11 In the circuit shown in Fig. 2.4. initially key K1 is closed and key
12
and Capacitance
K2 is open. Then K1 is opened and K2 is closed (order is important).

[Take Q1′ and Q2′ as charges on C1 and C2 and V1 and V2 as voltage
respectively.]
K1 K2
() ()
C1 C2
d
E
he
Fig. 2.4
Then
(a)
pu T
charge on C1 gets redistributed such that V1 = V2
is
(b) charge on C1 gets redistributed such that Q1′ = Q2′
re ER
(c) charge on C1 gets redistributed such that C1V1 + C2V2 = C1 E
2.12
(d)
bl
charge on C1 gets redistributed such that Q1′ + Q2′ = Q
If a conductor has a potential V ≠ 0 and there are no charges

anywhere else outside, then
be C
(a) there must be charges on the surface or inside itself.

(b) there cannot be any charge in the body of the conductor.
o N
(c) there must be charges only on the surface.

(d) there must be charges inside the surface.
tt ©
2.13 A parallel plate capacitor is connected to a battery as shown in

Fig. 2.5. Consider two situations: K
()
A: Key K is kept closed and plates of capacitors are moved apart
using insulating handle.
B: Key K is opened and plates of capacitors are moved apart using C
insulating handle.
Choose the correct option(s). E
E
(a) In A : Q remains same but C changes.
(b) In B : V remains same but C changes.
no
(c) In A : V remains same and hence Q changes. Fig. 2.5

(d) In B : Q remains same and hence V changes.
VSA
2.14 Consider two conducting spheres of radii R1 and R2 with R1 > R2. If
the two are at the same potential, the larger sphere has more charge
than the smaller sphere. State whether the charge density of the
13
smaller sphere is more or less than that of the larger one.
2.15 Do free electrons travel to region of higher potential or lower

potential?
2.16 Can there be a potential difference between two adjacent

conductors carrying the same charge?
2.17 Can the potential function have a maximum or minimum in free

space?
d
Q
θ
2.18 A test charge q is made to move in the electric field of a point charge
he
Q along two different closed paths (Fig. 2.6). First path has sections
along and perpendicular to lines of electric field. Second path is a
rectangular loop of the same area as the first loop. How does the
b
pu T
a
work done compare in the two cases?
is
re ER
Fig. 2.6 SA
bl 2.19 Prove that a closed equipotential surface with no charge within

itself must enclose an equipotential volume.
be C
2.20 A capacitor has some dielectric between its plates, and the capacitor
is connected to a DC source. The battery is now disconnected and
o N
then the dielectric is removed. State whether the capacitance, the

energy stored in it, electric field, charge stored and the voltage will
increase, decrease or remain constant.
tt ©
2.21 Prove that, if an insulated, uncharged conductor is placed near a

charged conductor and no other conductors are present, the
uncharged body must be intermediate in potential between that
of the charged body and that of infinity.
2.22 Calculate potential energy of a point charge –q placed along the

axis due to a charge +Q uniformly distributed along a ring of radius
R. Sketch P.E. as a function of axial distance z from the centre of
the ring. Looking at graph, can you see what would happen if -q is
displaced slightly from the centre of the ring (along the axis)?
no
2.23 Calculate potential on the axis of a ring due to charge Q uniformly

distributed along the ring of radius R.
LA
2.24 Find the equation of the equipotentials for an infinite cylinder of
radius r0, carrying charge of linear density λ.
14
and Capacitance
2.25 Two point charges of magnitude +q and -q are placed at

(-d/2, 0,0) and (d/2, 0,0), respectively. Find the equation of the
equipoential surface where the potential is zero.
2.26 A parallel plate capacitor is filled by a dielectric whose relative

permittivity varies with the applied voltage (U ) as ε = αU where
α = 2V–1 .A similar capacitor with no dielectric is charged to
U0 = 78 V. It is then connected to the uncharged capacitor with
the dielectric. Find the final voltage on the capacitors.
d
2.27 A capacitor is made of two circular plates of radius R each,
separated by a distance d<<R. The capacitor is connected to a
he
constant voltage. A thin conducting disc of radius r<<R and
thickness t<<r is placed at a centre of the bottom plate. Find
the minimum voltage required to lift the disc if the mass of the
pu T
is
disc is m.
re ER
2.28 (a) In a quark model of elementary particles, a neutron is made of
bl
one up quarks [charge (2/3) e] and two down quarks [charges
–(1/3) e]. Assume that they have a triangle configuration with
side length of the order of 10–15 m. Calculate electrostatic
potential energy of neutron and compare it with its mass 939
be C
MeV.
(b) Repeat above exercise for a proton which is made of two up
o N
and one down quark.
2.29 Two metal spheres, one of radius R and the other of radius 2R,
tt ©
both have same surface charge density σ . They are brought in

contact and separated. What will be new surface charge densities
on them?
C1=6C K1 K2
2.30 In the circuit shown in Fig. 2.7, initially K1
is closed and K2 is open. What are the charges
on each capacitors.
Then K1 was opened and K2 was closed C2
(order is important), What will be the charge E = 9V C2=3C C3=3C
on each capacitor now? [C = 1μF]
2.31 Calculate potential on the axis of a disc of

no
radius R due to a charge Q uniformly distributed on its surface. Fig. 2.7
2.32 Two charges q1 and q2 are placed at (0, 0, d) and (0, 0, –d)
respectively. Find locus of points where the potential a zero.
2.33 Two charges –q each are separated by distance 2d. A third charge
+ q is kept at mid point O. Find potential energy of + q as a function
of small distance x from O due to – q charges. Sketch P.E. v/s x and
convince yourself that the charge at O is in an unstable equilibrium.
15
Chapter Three
CURRENT
ELECTRICITY
d
he
pu T
is
re ER
bl
be C
o N
MCQ I
tt ©
3.1 Consider a current carrying wire (current I ) in the shape of a circle.

Note that as the current progresses along the wire, the direction of
j (current density) changes in an exact manner, while the current I
remain unaffected. The agent that is essentially responsible for is
(a) source of emf.
(b) electric field produced by charges accumulated on the surface
of wire.
(c) the charges just behind a given segment of wire which push
them just the right way by repulsion.
no
e1
(d) the charges ahead.
r1
3.2 Two batteries of emf ε1 and ε2 (ε2 > ε1) and internal
resistances r1 and r2 respectively are connected in parallel A B
as shown in Fig 3.1.
(a) The equivalent emf εeq of the two cells is between ε1 e2 r2
and ε2, i.e. ε1< εeq < ε2.
Fig 3.1
16
Current Electricity
(b) The equivalent emf εeq is smaller than ε1 .

(c) The εeq is given by εeq = ε1 + ε2 always.
(d) εeq is independent of internal resistances r1 and r2.
3.3 A resistance R is to be measured using a meter bridge. Student

chooses the standard resistance S to be 100Ω. He finds the null
point at l1 = 2.9 cm. He is told to attempt to improve the accuracy.
Which of the following is a useful way?
(a) He should measure l1 more accurately.
d
(b) He should change S to 1000Ω and repeat the experiment.
(c) He should change S to 3Ω and repeat the experiment.
he
(d) He should give up hope of a more accurate measurement with
a meter bridge.
pu T
3.4 Two cells of emf’s approximately 5V and 10V are to be accurately
is
compared using a potentiometer of length 400cm.
re ER
(a) The battery that runs the potentiometer should have voltage of 8V.
bl
(b) The battery of potentiometer can have a voltage of 15V and R
adjusted so that the potential drop across the wire slightly
exceeds 10V.
(c) The first portion of 50 cm of wire itself should have a potential
be C
drop of 10V.
(d) Potentiometer is usually used for comparing resistances and
o N
not voltages.
3.5 A metal rod of length 10 cm and a rectangular cross-section of

1
tt ©
1cm × cm is connected to a battery across opposite faces. The

2
resistance will be
1
(a) maximum when the battery is connected across 1 cm × cm
2
faces.
(b) maximum when the battery is connected across 10 cm × 1 cm
faces.
1
(c) maximum when the battery is connected across 10 cm ×
2
cm faces.
no
(d) same irrespective of the three faces.

3.6 Which of the following characteristics of electrons determines the
current in a conductor?
(a) Drift velocity alone.
(b) Thermal velocity alone.
(c) Both drift velocity and thermal velocity.
(d) Neither drift nor thermal velocity.
17
MCQ II
3.7 Kirchhoff ’s junction rule is a reflection of
(a) conservation of current density vector.
(b) conservation of charge.
(c) the fact that the momentum with which a charged particle
approaches a junction is unchanged (as a vector) as the
charged particle leaves the junction.
d
(d) the fact that there is no accumulation of charges at a junction.
he
3.8 Consider a simple circuit shown in Fig 3.2. stands for a
R¢
variable resistance R ′. R ′ can vary from R0 to infinity. r is internal
resistance of the battery (r<<R<<R0).
A
pu T B
is
R (a) Potential drop across AB is nearly constant as R ′ is varied.
I
(b) Current through R′ is nearly a constant as R ′ is varied.
re ER
(c) Current I depends sensitively on R ′.
bl
r
V
Fig 3.2 V
(d) I ≥ always.
r +R
be C
3.9 Temperature dependence of resistivity ρ(T) of semiconductors,

insulators and metals is significantly based on the following
factors:
o N
(a) number of charge carriers can change with temperature T.

(b) time interval between two successive collisions can depend
on T.
tt ©
(c) length of material can be a function of T.

(d) mass of carriers is a function of T.
3.10 The measurement of an unknown resistance R is to be carried
out using Wheatstones bridge (see Fig. 3.25 of NCERT Book).
Two students perform an experiment in two ways. The first
students takes R2 = 10Ω and R1 = 5Ω. The other student takes R2
= 1000Ω and R1 = 500Ω. In the standard arm, both take R3 = 5Ω.
R2
Both find R = R3 = 10Ω within errors.
R1
no
(a) The errors of measurement of the two students are the same.
(b) Errors of measurement do depend on the accuracy with which
R2 and R1 can be measured.
(c) If the student uses large values of R2 and R1, the currents
through the arms will be feeble. This will make determination
of null point accurately more difficult.
(d) Wheatstone bridge is a very accurate instrument and has no
errors of measurement.
18
Current Electricity
3.11 In a meter bridge the point D is a neutral point R S

(Fig 3.3). B
(a) The meter bridge can have no other neutral A C

l1 G 100 l1
point for this set of resistances. D
(b) When the jockey contacts a point on meter wire
left of D, current flows to B from the wire.
(c) When the jockey contacts a point on the meter
wire to the right of D, current flows from B to
d
the wire through galvanometer.
he
(d) When R is increased, the neutral point shifts to ( )
left.
Fig 3.3
VSA
pu T
is
re ER
3.12 Is the motion of a charge across junction momentum conserving?
3.13 bl
Why or why not?
The relaxation time τ is nearly independent of applied E field

be C
whereas it changes significantly with temperature T. First fact is

(in part) responsible for Ohm’s law whereas the second fact leads
to variation of ρ with temperature. Elaborate why?
o N
3.14 What are the advantages of the null-point method in a Wheatstone

bridge? What additional measurements would be required to
tt ©
calculate Runknown by any other method?
3.15 What is the advantage of using thick metallic strips to join wires
in a potentiometer?
3.16 For wiring in the home, one uses Cu wires or Al wires. What
considerations are involved in this?
3.17 Why are alloys used for making standard resistance coils?
3.18 Power P is to be delivered to a device via transmission

no
cables having resistance RC. If V is the voltage across R E R

and I the current through it, find the power wasted ( )
and how can it be reduced.
J
3.19 AB is a potentiometer wire (Fig 3.4). If the value of R is A B
increased, in which direction will the balance point J
shift? G
Fig 3.4
19
3.20 While doing an experiment with potentiometer (Fig 3.5) it was

found that the deflection is one sided and (i) the deflection
decreased while moving from one end A of the wire to the end B;
E (ii) the deflection increased. while the jockey was moved towards
( ) the end B.
(i) Which terminal +or –ve of the cell E1, is connected at
A B X in case (i) and how is E1 related to E ?
E1
X y G (ii) Which terminal of the cell E1 is connected at X in case (ii)?
d
Fig 3.5
3.21 A cell of emf E and internal resistance r is connected across an
he
external resistance R. Plot a graph showing the variation of P.D.
across R, verses R.
SA
pu T
is
re ER
3.22 First a set of n equal resistors of R each are connected in series to
a battery of emf E and internal resistance R. A current I is observed
bl to flow. Then the n resistors are connected in parallel to the same

battery. It is observed that the current is increased 10 times. What
is ‘n’?
be C
3.23 Let there be n resistors R1 ............Rn with Rmax = max (R1......... Rn)
o N
and Rmin = min {R1 ..... Rn}. Show that when they are connected in
parallel, the resultant resistance RP< Rmin and when they are
connected in series, the resultant resistance RS > Rmax. Interpret
the result physically.
tt ©
3.24 The circuit in Fig 3.6 shows two A B

cells connected in opposition to
each other. Cell E1 is of emf 6V
E1 E2
and internal resistance 2Ω; the
cell E2 is of emf 4V and internal
resistance 8Ω. Find the
potential difference between the
points A and B. Fig 3.6
no
3.25 Two cells of same emf E but E E

B
internal resistance r1 and r2 are
connected in series to an
external resistor R (Fig 3.7).
What should be the value of R
so that the potential difference
across the terminals of the first R
cell becomes zero.
Fig. 3.7
20
Current Electricity
3.26 Two conductors are made of the same material and have the same
length. Conductor A is a solid wire of diameter 1mm. Conductor B
is a hollow tube of outer diameter 2mm and inner diameter 1mm.
Find the ratio of resistance RA to RB.
3.27 Suppose there is a circuit consisting of only resistances and

batteries. Suppose one is to double (or increase it to n-times) all
voltages and all resistances. Show that currents are unaltered.
Do this for circuit of Example 3.7 in the NCERT Text Book for
d
Class XII.
R
he
I 2V
LA
pu T I2 5W
is
3.28 Two cells of voltage 10V and 2V and internal resistances 10Ω
re ER
and 5Ω respectively, are connected in parallel with the positive
I1 10W
end of 10V battery connected to negative pole of 2V battery
bl
10V
(Fig 3.8). Find the effective voltage and effective resistance of the
combination. Fig 3.8
be C
3.29 A room has AC run for 5 hours a day at a voltage of 220V. The
wiring of the room consists of Cu of 1 mm radius and a length of
o N
10 m. Power consumption per day is 10 commercial units. What

fraction of it goes in the joule heating in wires? What would happen
if the wiring is made of aluminium of the same dimensions?
E2 E1 1 3
–8
, ρAl = 2.7 × 10 Ωm]
tt ©
–8
[ρcu = 1.7 × 10 Ωm G
A 2
B
3.30 In an experiment with a potentiometer, VB = 10V. R is adjusted to

be 50Ω (Fig. 3.9). A student wanting to measure voltage E1 of a N1
battery (approx. 8V) finds no null point possible. He then R
diminishes R to 10Ω and is able to locate the null point on the
last (4th) segment of the potentiometer. Find the resistance of the ( ) C
K1
potentiometer wire and potential drop per unit length across the
Fig 3.9
wire in the second case.
R = 6W
no
3.31 (a) Consider circuit in Fig 3.10. How much energy is absorbed I
by electrons from the initial state of no current (ignore thermal I
motion) to the state of drift velocity?
(b) Electrons give up energy at the rate of RI2 per second to the
thermal energy. What time scale would one associate with
V = 6V
energy in problem (a)? n = no of electron/volume = 1029/m3,
length of circuit = 10 cm, cross-section = A = (1mm)2 Fig 3.10
21
Chapter Four
MOVING CHARGES
AND MAGNETISM
d
he
pu T
is
re ER
bl
be C
o N
MCQ I
tt ©
4.1 Two charged particles traverse identical helical paths in a completely

opposite sense in a uniform magnetic field B = B0 k̂ .
(a) They have equal z-components of momenta.

(b) They must have equal charges.
(c) They necessarily represent a particle-antiparticle pair.
⎛e ⎞ ⎛e ⎞
(d) The charge to mass ratio satisfy : ⎜ ⎟ + ⎜ ⎟ = 0 .
⎝ m ⎠1 ⎝ m ⎠2
no
4.2 Biot-Savart law indicates that the moving electrons (velocity v)

produce a magnetic field B such that
(a) B ⊥ v.
(b) B ||v.
(c) it obeys inverse cube law.
(d) it is along the line joining the electron and point of observation.
Moving Charges and Magnetism
4.3 A current carrying circular loop of radius R is placed in the x-y

plane with centre at the origin. Half of the loop with x > 0 is now
bent so that it now lies in the y-z plane.
(a) The magnitude of magnetic moment now diminishes.
(b) The magnetic moment does not change.
(c) The magnitude of B at (0.0.z), z >>R increases.
(d) The magnitude of B at (0.0.z), z >>R is unchanged.
d
4.4 An electron is projected with uniform velocity along the axis of a
current carrying long solenoid. Which of the following is true?
he
(a) The electron will be accelerated along the axis.
(b) The electron path will be circular about the axis.
pu T
(c) The electron will experience a force at 45° to the axis and hence
is
execute a helical path.
(d) The electron will continue to move with uniform velocity along
re ER
the axis of the solenoid.
4.5
bl
In a cyclotron, a charged particle
(a) undergoes acceleration all the time.
be C
(b) speeds up between the dees because of the magnetic field.

(c) speeds up in a dee.
o N
(d) slows down within a dee and speeds up between dees.
4.6 A circular current loop of magnetic moment M is in an arbitrary

tt ©
orientation in an external magnetic field B. The work done to rotate

the loop by 30° about an axis perpendicular to its plane is
(a) MB.
MB
(b) 3 .
2
MB
(c) .
2
(d) zero.
MCQ II
no
4.7 The gyro-magnetic ratio of an electron in an H-atom, according to

Bohr model, is
(a) independent of which orbit it is in.
(b) negative.
(c) positive.
(d) increases with the quantum number n.
23
4.8 Consider a wire carrying a steady current, I placed in a uniform

magnetic field B perpendicular to its length. Consider the charges
inside the wire. It is known that magnetic forces do no work. This
implies that,
(a) motion of charges inside the conductor is unaffected by B since
they do not absorb energy.
(b) some charges inside the wire move to the surface as a result
of B.
(c) if the wire moves under the influence of B, no work is done by
d
the force.
he
(d) if the wire moves under the influence of B, no work is done by
the magnetic force on the ions, assumed fixed within the wire.
pu T 4.9 Two identical current carrying coaxial loops, carry current I in an
is
opposite sense. A simple amperian loop passes through both of
them once. Calling the loop as C,
re ER
bl (a) ∫ B.dl = m2μ0 I .
Ñ
c
(b) the value of ∫ B.dl

Ñ is independent of sense of C.
be C
c
(c) there may be a point on C where B and dl are perpendicular.
(d) B vanishes everywhere on C.
o N
4.10 A cubical region of space is filled with some uniform electric and
magnetic fields. An electron enters the cube across one of its faces
tt ©
with velocity v and a positron enters via opposite face with velocity
- v. At this instant,
(a) the electric forces on both the particles cause identical
accelerations.
(b) the magnetic forces on both the particles cause equal
accelerations.
(c) both particles gain or loose energy at the same rate.
(d) the motion of the centre of mass (CM) is determined by B alone.
4.11 A charged particle would continue to move with a constant velocity

no
in a region wherein,
(a) E = 0, B ≠ 0.
(b) E ≠ 0, B ≠ 0.
(c) E ≠ 0, B = 0.
(d) E = 0, B = 0.
24
VSA
4.12 Verify that the cyclotron frequency ω = eB/m has the correct
dimensions of [T]–1.
4.13 Show that a force that does no work must be a velocity dependent
force.
d
4.14 The magnetic force depends on v which depends on the inertial
frame of reference. Does then the magnetic force differ from inertial
he
frame to frame? Is it reasonable that the net acceleration has a
different value in different frames of reference?
4.15
pu T
Describe the motion of a charged particle in a cyclotron if the
is
z
frequency of the radio frequency (rf) field were doubled.
re ER
O2
I2
4.16
bl
Two long wires carrying current I1 and I2 are arranged as shown in
Fig. 4.1. The one carrying current I1 is along is the x-axis. The
other carrying current I2 is along a line parallel to the y-axis given
d
be C
by x = 0 and z = d. Find the force exerted at O2 because of the wire y

O1
along the x-axis.
I1
o N
Fig. 4.1
SA x
4.17 A current carrying loop consists of 3 identical quarter circles of

tt ©
radius R, lying in the positive quadrants of the x-y, y-z and z-x
planes with their centres at the origin, joined together. Find the
direction and magnitude of B at the origin.
4.18 A charged particle of charge e and mass m is moving in an electric

field E and magnetic field B. Construct dimensionless quantities
and quantities of dimension [T ]–1.
4.19 An electron enters with a velocity v = v0i into a cubical region (faces
parallel to coordinate planes) in which there are uniform electric
no
and magnetic fields. The orbit of the electron is found to spiral

down inside the cube in plane parallel to the x-y plane. Suggest a
configuration of fields E and B that can lead to it.
4.20 Do magnetic forces obey Newton’s third law. Verify for two current
elements dl1 = dl î located at the origin and dl2 = dl ĵ located at
(0, R, 0). Both carry current I.
25
R1 R 2 R 3
G 4.21 A multirange voltmeter can be constructed by using a
galvanometer circuit as shown in Fig. 4.2. We want to construct
a voltmeter that can measure 2V, 20V and 200V using a
galvanometer of resistance 10Ω and that produces maximum
deflection for current of 1 mA. Find R1, R2 and R3 that have to be
used.
2V 20V 200V
Fig. 4.2
4.22 A long straight wire carrying current of 25A rests on a table as
shown in Fig. 4.3. Another wire PQ of length 1m, mass 2.5 g
d
carries the same current but in the opposite direction. The wire
P Q
PQ is free to slide up and down. To what height will PQ rise?
he
h
LA
Fig. 4.3
pu T
is
4.23 A 100 turn rectangular coil ABCD (in XY plane) is hung from one
re ER
arm of a balance (Fig. 4.4). A mass 500g is added to the other arm
to balance the weight of the coil. A current 4.9 A passes through
A
bl B
the coil and a constant magnetic field of 0.2 T acting inward (in xz
plane) is switched on such that only arm CD of length 1 cm lies in
the field. How much additional mass ‘m’ must be added to regain
be C
the balance?
D C
X X X X XX
XX X XX
o N
Fig. 4.4
4.24 A rectangular conducting loop consists of two wires on two opposite
sides of length l joined together by rods of length d. The wires are
each of the same material but with cross-sections differing by a
factor of 2. The thicker wire has a resistance R and the rods are of
tt ©
low resistance, which in turn are connected to a constant voltage

source V0. The loop is placed in uniform a magnetic field B at 45°
to its plane. Find τ, the torque exerted by the magnetic field on the
loop about an axis through the centres of rods.
4.25 An electron and a positron are released from (0, 0, 0) and

(0, 0, 1.5R ) respectively, in a uniform magnetic field B = B0 î , each
with an equal momentum of magnitude p = e BR. Under what
conditions on the direction of momentum will the orbits be non-
intersecting circles?
no
4.26 A uniform conducting wire of length 12a and resistance R is wound

up as a current carrying coil in the shape of (i) an equilateral
triangle of side a; (ii) a square of sides a and, (iii) a regular hexagon
of sides a. The coil is connected to a voltage source V0. Find the
magnetic moment of the coils in each case.
26
4.27 Consider a circular current-carrying loop of radius R in the x-y

plane with centre at origin. Consider the line intergral
L
ℑ (L ) = ∫ B.dl taken along z-axis.
–L
(a) Show that ℑ (L) monotonically increases with L.

(b) Use an appropriate Amperian loop to show that ℑ ( ∞ ) = μ0 I ,
where I is the current in the wire.
d
(c) Verify directly the above result.
(d) Suppose we replace the circular coil by a square coil of sides R
he
carrying the same current I. What can you say about S3
ℑ ( L ) and ℑ ( ∞ ) ? G
S1 S2
pu T
is
4.28 A multirange current meter can be constructed by using a
re ER
galvanometer circuit as shown in Fig. 4.5. We want a current meter
that can measure 10mA, 100mA and 1A using a galvanometer of
bl
resistance 10Ω and that prduces maximum deflection for current
of 1mA. Find S1, S2 and S3 that have to be used 10mA 100mA 1A
Fig. 4.5
be C
4.29 Five long wires A, B, C, D and E, each carrying current I are A

arranged to form edges of a pentagonal prism as shown in Fig.
o N
4.6. Each carries current out of the plane of paper.

(a) What will be magnetic induction at a point on the axis O? AxisE R
B
is at a distance R from each wire.
tt ©
O
(b) What will be the field if current in one of the wires (say A) is
switched off?
(c) What if current in one of the wire (say) A is reversed?
D C
Fig. 4.6
no
27
Chapter Five
MAGNETISM AND
MATTER
d
he
pu T
is
re ER
bl
be C
o N
MCQ I
tt ©
5.1 A toroid of n turns, mean radius R and cross-sectional radius a

carries current I. It is placed on a horizontal table taken as
x-y plane. Its magnetic moment m
(a) is non-zero and points in the z-direction by symmetry.
(b) points along the axis of the tortoid ( m = m φˆ ).
1
(c) is zero, otherwise there would be a field falling as at large
r3
distances outside the toroid.
no
(d) is pointing radially outwards.

5.2 The magnetic field of Earth can be modelled by that of a point dipole
placed at the centre of the Earth. The dipole axis makes an angle of
11.3° with the axis of Earth. At Mumbai, declination is nearly zero.
Then,
(a) the declination varies between 11.3° W to 11.3° E.
(b) the least declination is 0°.
28
Magnetism and Matter
(c) the plane defined by dipole axis and Earth axis passes through
Greenwich.
(d) declination averaged over Earth must be always negative.
5.3 In a permanent magnet at room temperature
(a) magnetic moment of each molecule is zero.
(b) the individual molecules have non-zero magnetic moment
which are all perfectly aligned.
(c) domains are partially aligned.
d
(d) domains are all perfectly aligned.
he
5.4 Consider the two idealized systems: (i) a parallel plate capacitor
with large plates and small separation and (ii) a long solenoid of
length L >> R, radius of cross-section. In (i) E is ideally treated as
pu T
a constant between plates and zero outside. In (ii) magnetic field is
is
constant inside the solenoid and zero outside. These idealised
re ER
assumptions, however, contradict fundamental laws as below:
bl
(a) case (i) contradicts Gauss’s law for electrostatic fields.
(b) case (ii) contradicts Gauss’s law for magnetic fields.
(c) case (i) agrees with ∫ E.dl = 0 .
be C
(d) case (ii) contradicts ∫ H.dl = I en

o N
5.5 A paramagnetic sample shows a net magnetisation of 8 Am–1 when

placed in an external magnetic field of 0.6T at a temperature of
4K. When the same sample is placed in an external magnetic field
of 0.2 T at a temperature of 16 K, the magnetisation will be
tt ©
32
(a) Am –1
3
2
(b) Am –1
3
(c) 6 Am –1
(d) 2.4 Am –1 .
MCQ II
no
5.6 S is the surface of a lump of magnetic material.

(a) Lines of B are necessarily continuous across S.
(b) Some lines of B must be discontinuous across S.
(c) Lines of H are necessarily continuous across S.
(d) Lines of H cannot all be continuous across S.
29
5.7 The primary origin(s) of magnetism lies in

(a) atomic currents.
(b) Pauli exclusion principle.
(c) polar nature of molecules.
(d) intrinsic spin of electron.
5.8 A long solenoid has 1000 turns per metre and carries a current of
1 A. It has a soft iron core of μr = 1000 . The core is heated beyond
the Curie temperature, Tc.
d
(a) The H field in the solenoid is (nearly) unchanged but the B field
he
decreases drastically.
(b) The H and B fields in the solenoid are nearly unchanged.
(c) The magnetisation in the core reverses direction.
pu T (d) The magnetisation in the core diminishes by a factor of
is
about 10 8.
re ER
5.9 Essential difference between electrostatic shielding by a conducting
bl shell and magnetostatic shielding is due to

(a) electrostatic field lines can end on charges and conductors have
free charges.
be C
(b) lines of B can also end but conductors cannot end them.
(c) lines of B cannot end on any material and perfect shielding is
o N
not possible.
(d) shells of high permeability materials can be used to divert lines
of B from the interior region.
tt ©
5.10 Let the magnetic field on earth be modelled by that of a point

magnetic dipole at the centre of earth. The angle of dip at a point on
the geographical equator
(a) is always zero.
(b) can be zero at specific points.
(c) can be positive or negative.
(d) is bounded.
VSA
no
5.11 A proton has spin and magnetic moment just like an electron. Why
then its effect is neglected in magnetism of materials?
5.12 A permanent magnet in the shape of a thin cylinder of length 10 cm

has M = 106 A/m. Calculate the magnetisation current IM.
5.13 Explain quantitatively the order of magnitude difference between the

diamagnetic susceptibility of N2 (~5 × 10–9) (at STP) and Cu (~10–5).
30
Magnetism and Matter
5.14 From molecular view point, discuss the temperature dependence

of susceptibility for diamagnetism, paramagnetism and
ferromagnetism.
5.15 A ball of superconducting material is dipped in liquid nitrogen and

placed near a bar magnet. (i) In which direction will it move?
(ii) What will be the direction of it’s magnetic moment?
SA
d
5.16 Verify the Gauss’s law for magnetic field of a point dipole of dipole N
he
moment m at the origin for the surface which is a sphere of radius R. ? ?
60°
5.17 Three identical bar magnets are rivetted together at centre in the
pu T
same plane as shown in Fig. 5.1. This system is placed at rest in a
is
slowly varying magnetic field. It is found that the system of magnets 60°
re ER
does not show any motion. The north-south poles of one magnet is
? ?
shown in the Fig. 5.1. Determine the poles of the remaining two.
bl
5.18 Suppose we want to verify the analogy between electrostatic and
magnetostatic by an explicit experiment. Consider the motion of
S
Fig. 5.1
be C
(i) electric dipole p in an electrostatic field E and (ii) magnetic dipole

m in a magnetic field B. Write down a set of conditions on E, B, p,
m so that the two motions are verified to be identical. (Assume
o N
identical initial conditions.)
5.19 A bar magnet of magnetic moment m and moment of inertia I (about

tt ©
centre, perpendicular to length) is cut into two equal pieces,

perpendicular to length. Let T be the period of oscillations of the
original magnet about an axis through the mid point, perpendicular
to length, in a magnetic field B. What would be the similar period T′
for each piece?
5.20 Use (i) the Ampere’s law for H and (ii) continuity of lines of B, to
conclude that inside a bar magnet, (a) lines of H run from the N pole
to S pole, while (b) lines of B must run from the S pole to N pole.
LA
no
5.21 Verify the Ampere’s law for magnetic field of a point dipole of dipole
moment m = m k ˆ . Take C as the closed curve running clockwise
along (i) the z-axis from z = a > 0 to z = R; (ii) along the quarter circle
of radius R and centre at the origin, in the first quadrant of x-z
plane; (iii) along the x-axis from x = R to x = a, and (iv) along the
quarter circle of radius a and centre at the origin in the first quadrant
of x-z plane.
31
5.22 What are the dimensions of χ, the magnetic susceptibility? Consider

an H-atom. Guess an expression for χ, upto a constant by
constructing a quantity of dimensions of χ, out of parameters of
the atom: e, m, v, R and μ0 . Here, m is the electronic mass, v is
electronic velocity, R is Bohr radius. Estimate the number so
obtained and compare with the value of χ ~ 10 –5 for many
solid materials.
5.23 Assume the dipole model for earth’s magnetic field B which is given
μ0 2m cos θ
d
by BV = vertical component of magnetic field =
4π r3
he
μ0 sinθ m
BH = Horizontal component of magnetic field =
4π r3
θ = 90° – lattitude as measured from magnetic equator.
pu T
is
Find loci of points for which (i) B is minimum; (ii) dip angle is zero;
re ER
and (iii) dip angle is ± 45°.
bl
5.24 Consider the plane S formed by the dipole axis and the axis of earth.
Let P be point on the magnetic equator and in S. Let Q be the point
of intersection of the geographical and magnetic equators. Obtain
the declination and dip angles at P and Q.
be C
5.25 There are two current carrying planar coils made each from identical
wires of length L. C1 is circular (radius R ) and C2 is square (side a).
o N
They are so constructed that they have same frequency of oscillation

when they are placed in the same uniform B and carry the same
current. Find a in terms of R.
tt ©
no
32
Electromagnetic Induction
Chapter Six
ELECTROMAGNETIC
INDUCTION
d
he
pu T
is
re ER
bl
be C
o N
MCQ 1
tt ©
6.1 A square of side L meters lies in the x-y plane in a region, where the
magnetic field is given by B = Bo (2 î + 3ˆj + 4 k ˆ ) T, where B is
o
constant. The magnitude of flux passing through the square is
(a) 2 Bo L2 Wb.
(b) 3 Bo L2 Wb.
(c) 4 Bo L2 Wb.
(d) 29 Bo L2 Wb.
6.2 A loop, made of straight edges has six corners at A(0,0,0), B(L,O,0)
no
C(L,L,0), D(0,L,0) E(0,L,L) and F(0,0,L). A magnetic field

B = Bo (î + k
ˆ ) T is present in the region. The flux passing through
the loop ABCDEFA (in that order) is
(a) Bo L2 Wb.
(b) 2 Bo L2 Wb.
2
(c) 2 Bo L Wb.
(d) 4 Bo L2 Wb.
33
6.3 A cylindrical bar magnet is rotated about its axis (Fig 6.1). A wire is
axis
A connected from the axis and is made to touch the cylindrical surface
N through a contact. Then
bar
(a) a direct current flows in the ammeter A.
magnet w
(b) no current flows through the ammeter A.
(c) an alternating sinusoidal current flows through the ammeter A
with a time period T=2π/ω.
S (d) a time varying non-sinosoidal current flows through the
d
ammeter A.
Fig. 6.1
6.4 There are two coils A and B as shown in Fig 6.2. A current starts
he
flowing in B as shown, when A is moved towards B and stops when
A B A stops moving. The current in A is counterclockwise. B is kept
v stationary when A moves. We can infer that
pu T
is
(a) there is a constant current in the clockwise direction in A.
re ER
(b) there is a varying current in A.
Fig. 6.2
bl
(c) there is no current in A.
(d) there is a constant current in the counterclockwise direction
in A.
be C
6.5 Same as problem 4 except the coil A is made to rotate about a vertical
axis (Fig 6.3). No current flows in B if A is at rest. The current in coil
o N
A A, when the current in B (at t = 0) is counterclockwise and the coil A

w B is as shown at this instant, t = 0, is
(a) constant current clockwise.
tt ©
(b) varying current clockwise.

(c) varying current counterclockwise.
Fig. 6.3
(d) constant current counterclockwise.
6.6 The self inductance L of a solenoid of length l and area of cross-

section A, with a fixed number of turns N increases as
(a) l and A increase.
(b) l decreases and A increases.
(c) l increases and A decreases.
(d) both l and A decrease.
no
MCQ II
6.7 A metal plate is getting heated. It can be because

(a) a direct current is passing through the plate.
(b) it is placed in a time varying magnetic field.
34
(c) it is placed in a space varying magnetic field, but does not vary
with time.
(d) a current (either direct or alternating) is passing through the
plate.
6.8 An e.m.f is produced in a coil, which is not connected to an external
voltage source. This can be due to
(a) the coil being in a time varying magnetic field.
(b) the coil moving in a time varying magnetic field.
d
(c) the coil moving in a constant magnetic field.
(d) the coil is stationary in external spatially varying magnetic field,
he
which does not change with time.
6.9 The mutual inductance M12 of coil 1 with respect to coil 2
(a)
pu T
increases when they are brought nearer.
is
(b) depends on the current passing through the coils.
re ER
(c) increases when one of them is rotated about an axis.
bl
(d) is the same as M21 of coil 2 with respect to coil 1.
6.10 A circular coil expands radially in a region of magnetic field and

no electromotive force is produced in the coil. This can be because
be C
(a) the magnetic field is constant.

(b) the magnetic field is in the same plane as the circular coil and
o N
it may or may not vary.

(c) the magnetic field has a perpendicular (to the plane of the coil)
component whose magnitude is decreasing suitably.
tt ©
(d) there is a constant magnetic field in the perpendicular (to the

plane of the coil) direction.
VSA
6.11 Consider a magnet surrounded by a wire with an on/off switch S
(Fig 6.4). If the switch is thrown from the off position (open circuit)
to the on position (closed circuit), will a current flow in the circuit?
Explain.
no
N N
Bar Bar
magnet magnet
Circuit open Circuit closed
Fig. 6.4
35
6.12 A wire in the form of a tightly wound solenoid is connected to a DC

source, and carries a current. If the coil is stretched so that there
are gaps between successive elements of the spiral coil, will the
ring
current increase or decrease? Explain.
6.13 A solenoid is connected to a battery so that a steady current flows

through it. If an iron core is inserted into the solenoid, will the
current increase or decrease? Explain.
6.14 Consider a metal ring kept on top of a fixed solenoid (say on a
d
.. carboard) (Fig 6.5). The centre of the ring coincides with the axis
..
he
of the solenoid. If the current is suddenly switched on, the metal
..
.. ring jumps up. Explain
.
6.15 Consider a metal ring kept (supported by a cardboard) on top of a
pu T
is
Fig. 6.5 fixed solenoid carrying a current I (see Fig 6.5). The centre of the
ring coincides with the axis of the solenoid. If the current in the
re ER
solenoid is switched off, what will happen to the ring?
bl 6.16 Consider a metallic pipe with an inner radius of 1 cm. If a cylindrical

bar magnet of radius 0.8cm is dropped through the pipe, it takes
more time to come down than it takes for a similar unmagnetised
be C
cylindrical iron bar dropped through the metallic pipe. Explain.

y
o N
k̂ SA
x 6.17 A magnetic field in a certain region is given by B = Bo cos ( ωt ) k ˆ
tt ©
(0,0,0) (a,0,0)
and a coil of radius a with resistance R is placed in the x-y plane
with its centre at the origin in the magnetic field (see Fig 6.6) . Find
the magnitude and the direction of the current at (a, 0, 0) at
Fig. 6.6
t = π /2ω , t = π / ω and t = 3π /2ω .
S2
6.18 Consider a closed loop C in a magnetic field (Fig 6.7). The flux
S1
passing through the loop is defined by choosing a surface whose
c edge coincides with the loop and using the formula
Fig. 6.7 φ = B1.dA1 + B 2 .dA 2 + ... . Now if we chose two different surfaces
no
S1 and S2 having C as their edge, would we get the same answer

B D B
P for flux. Jusity your answer.
R B
BC v 6.19 Find the current in the wire for the configuration shown in
Fig 6.8. Wire PQ has negligible resistance. B, the magnetic
q field is coming out of the paper. θ is a fixed angle made by PQ
Q B B travelling smoothly over two conducting parallel wires
seperated by a distance d.
Fig. 6.8
36
6.20 A (current vs time) graph of the current passing through a solenoid

is shown in Fig 6.9. For which time is the back electromotive force
(u) a maximum. If the back emf at t = 3s is e, find the back emf at
t = 7 s, 15s and 40s. OA, AB and BC are straight line segments.
2A
Current (A)
A
1A
C
d
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
he
1A Time (s)
pu T
2A
is
B
re ER
Fig. 6.9
6.21
bl
There are two coils A and B seperated by some distance. If a current
of 2 A flows through A, a magnetic flux of 10-2 Wb passes through
B (no current through B). If no current passes through A and a
be C
current of 1 A passes through B, what is the flux through A?
LA
o N
6.22 A magnetic field B = Bo sin ( ωt ) k

ˆ covers a large region where a
A
tt ©
wire AB slides smoothly over two parallel conductors separated C

by a distance d (Fig. 6.10). The wires are in the x-y plane. The wire v
AB (of length d) has resistance R and the parallel wires have
negligible resistance. If AB is moving with velocity v, what is the
current in the circuit. What is the force needed to keep the wire O B x
moving at constant velocity? Fig. 6.10
6.23 A conducting wire XY of mass m and neglibile resistance

slides smoothly on two parallel conducting wires as y
shown in Fig 6.11. The closed circuit has a resistance R
due to AC. AB and CD are perfect conductors. There is a A X
no
B
ˆ.
magnetic field B = B(t )k B
R l
(i) Write down equation for the acceleration of the wire B
XY. Y x
C x (t) D
(ii) If B is independent of time, obtain v(t) , assuming v
(0) = u0. Fig. 6.11
(iii) For (b), show that the decrease in kinetic energy of XY equals
the heat lost in R.
37
6.24 ODBAC is a fixed rectangular conductor of negilible resistance

A B B
(CO is not connnected) and OP is a conductor which rotates
B B
clockwise with an angular velocity ω (Fig 6.12). The entire system
l is in a uniform magnetic field B whose direction is along the normal
w to the surface of the rectangular conductor ABDC. The conductor
l l
P OP is in electric contact with ABDC. The rotating conductor has a
C O
2l
D P resistance of λ per unit length. Find the current in the rotating
conductor, as it rotates by 180°.
Fig. 6.12
d
6.25 Consider an infinitely long wire carrying a current I (t ), with
dI
= λ = constant. Find the current produced in the rectangular
he
dt
loop of wire ABCD if its resistance is R (Fig. 6.13).
l B
pu T
A
is
re ER
dr
bl
x
D r C
xo
be C
I (t)
Fig. 6.13
o N
6.26 A rectangular loop of wire ABCD is kept close to an infinitely long

wire carrying a current I (t ) = I o (1 – t / T ) for 0 ≤ t ≤ T and
I (0) = 0 for t > T (Fig. 6.14). Find the total charge passing through
tt ©
a given point in the loop, in time T. The resistance of the loop is R.
A L1 B
L2 + x
D x C
I (t)
Fig. 6.14
no
Q.27 A magnetic field B is confined to a region r ≤ a and points out of

the paper (the z-axis), r = 0 being the centre of the circular region.
A charged ring (charge = Q) of radius b, b > a and mass m lies in
the x-y plane with its centre at the origin. The ring is free to rotate
and is at rest. The magnetic field is brought to zero in time Δt.
Find the angular velocity ω of the ring after the field vanishes.
38
6.28 A rod of mass m and resistance R slides smoothly over two parallel
perfectly conducting wires kept sloping at an angle θ with respect
to the horizontal (Fig. 6.15). The circuit is closed through a perfect
v
conductor at the top. There is a constant magnetic field B along B
the vertical direction. If the rod is initially at rest, find the velocity
q
of the rod as a function of time. d
6.29 Find the current in the sliding rod AB (resistance = R) for the Fig. 6.15
arrangement shown in Fig 6.16. B is constant and is out of the X A
d
paper. Parallel wires have no resistance. v is constant. Switch S S
is closed at time t = 0. B v
C d
B
he
6.30 Find the current in the sliding rod AB (resistance = R) for the Y B
arrangement shown in Fig 6.17. B is constant and is out of the
Fig. 6.16
paper. Parallel wires have no resistance. v is constant. Switch S is
pu T
is
closed at time t = 0.
re ER
X A
bl
S B
B
v d
L
B B
be C
B
B B
o N
Fig. 6.17
6.31 A metallic ring of mass m and radius l (ring being horizontal) is

falling under gravity in a region having a magnetic field. If z is the
tt ©
vertical direction, the z-component of magnetic field is Bz = Bo

(1+λ z). If R is the resistance of the ring and if the ring falls with a
velocity v, find the energy lost in the resistance. If the ring has
reached a constant velocity, use the conservation of energy to
determine v in terms of m, B, λ and acceleration due to gravity g.
6.32 A long solenoid ‘S’ has ‘n’ turns per meter, with diameter ‘a’. At the
centre of this coil we place a smaller coil of ‘N’ turns and diameter
‘b’ (where b < a). If the current in the solenoid increases linearly,
with time, what is the induced emf appearing in the smaller coil.
Plot graph showing nature of variation in emf, if current varies as
no
a function of mt2 + C.
39
Chapter Seven
ALTERNATING
CURRENT
d
he
pu T
is
re ER
bl
be C
o N
MCQ 1
tt ©
7.1 If the rms current in a 50 Hz ac circuit is 5 A, the value of the

current 1/300 seconds after its value becomes zero is
(a) 5 2 A
(b) 5 3 / 2 A
(c) 5/6 A
(d) 5 / 2 A
7.2 An alternating current generator has an internal resistance Rg
and an internal reactance Xg. It is used to supply power to a
passive load consisting of a resistance Rg and a reactance XL. For
no
maximum power to be delivered from the generator to the load,

the value of XL is equal to
(a) zero.
(b) Xg.
(c) – Xg.
(d) Rg.
Alternating Current
7.3 When a voltage measuring device is connected to AC mains, the

meter shows the steady input voltage of 220V. This means
(a) input voltage cannot be AC voltage, but a DC voltage.
(b) maximum input voltage is 220V.
(c) the meter reads not v but <v2> and is calibrated to read
< v2 > .
(d) the pointer of the meter is stuck by some mechanical defect.
d
7.4 To reduce the reasonant frequency in an LCR series circuit with a
generator
he
(a) the generator frequency should be reduced.
(b) another capacitor should be added in parallel to the first.
(c)
pu T
the iron core of the inductor should be removed.
is
(d) dielectric in the capacitor should be removed.
re ER
7.5 Which of the following combinations should be selected for better
(a)
(b) bl
tuning of an LCR circuit used for communication?
R = 20 Ω, L = 1.5 H, C = 35μF.
R = 25 Ω, L = 2.5 H, C = 45μF.
be C
(c) R = 15 Ω, L = 3.5 H, C = 30μF.

(d) R = 25 Ω, L = 1.5 H, C = 45μF.
o N
7.6 An inductor of reactance 1 Ω and a resistor of 2 Ω are connected in

series to the terminals of a 6 V (rms) a.c. source. The power dissipated
in the circuit is
tt ©
(a) 8 W.
(b) 12 W.
(c) 14.4 W.
(d) 18 W.
7.7 The output of a step-down transformer is measured to be 24 V
when connected to a 12 watt light bulb. The value of the peak
current is
(a) 1/ 2 A.
no
(b) 2 A.
(c) 2 A.
(d) 2 2 A.
41
MCQ II
7.8 As the frequency of an ac circuit increases, the current first increases
and then decreases. What combination of circuit elements is most
likely to comprise the circuit?
(a) Inductor and capacitor.
(b) Resistor and inductor.
(c) Resistor and capacitor.
d
(d) Resistor, inductor and capacitor.
he
7.9 In an alternating current circuit consisting of elements in series,
the current increases on increasing the frequency of supply. Which
of the following elements are likely to constitute the circuit ?
pu T (a) Only resistor.
is
(b) Resistor and an inductor.
re ER
(c) Resistor and a capacitor.
bl
(d) Only a capacitor.
7.10 Electrical energy is transmitted over large distances at high
alternating voltages. Which of the following statements is (are)
be C
correct?
(a) For a given power level, there is a lower current.
o N
(b) Lower current implies less power loss.

(c) Transmission lines can be made thinner.
(d) It is easy to reduce the voltage at the receiving end using
tt ©
step-down transformers.
7.11 For an LCR circuit, the power transferred from the driving source
to the driven oscillator is P = I2Z cos φ.
(a) Here, the power factor cos φ ≥ 0, P ≥ 0.
(b) The driving force can give no energy to the oscillator (P = 0) in
some cases.
(c) The driving force cannot syphon out (P < 0) the energy out of
oscillator.
(d) The driving force can take away energy out of the oscillator.
no
7.12 When an AC voltage of 220 V is applied to the capacitor C

(a) the maximum voltage between plates is 220 V.
(b) the current is in phase with the applied voltage.
(c) the charge on the plates is in phase with the applied voltage.
(d) power delivered to the capacitor is zero.
42
Alternating Current
7.13 The line that draws power supply to your house from street has
(a) zero average current.
(b) 220 V average voltage.
(c) voltage and current out of phase by 90°.
(d) voltage and current possibly differing in phase φ such that
π
φ< .
2
VSA
d
he
7.14 If a LC circuit is considered analogous to a harmonically oscillating
spring block system, which energy of the LC circuit would be
analogous to potential energy and which one analogous to kinetic
energy?
pu T R1 C1 L1
is
re ER
7.15 Draw the effective equivalent circuit of the circuit shown in C2
Fig 7.1, at very high frequencies and find the effective impedance.
bl
L2 R2 R3
7.16 Study the circuits (a) and (b) shown in Fig 7.2 and answer the
~
following questions.
be C
R R C L Fig. 7.1
o N
~ ~
(a) (b)
tt ©
Fig. 7.2
(a) Under which conditions would the rms currents in the two
circuits be the same?
(b) Can the rms current in circuit (b) be larger than that in (a)?
7.17 Can the instantaneous power output of an ac source ever be
negative? Can the average power output be negative?
7.18 In series LCR circuit, the plot of Imax vs ω is shown in Fig 7.3. Find
the bandwidth and mark in the figure.
no
1.0
Im (A)
0.5
0
.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
w(rad/s)
Fig. 7.3
43
7.19 The alternating current in a circuit is described by the graph

shown in Fig 7.4 . Show rms current in this graph.
3
2
1
I (A)
0 T 2T
–1
–2 t
–3
d
Fig. 7.4
he
7.20 How does the sign of the phase angle φ , by which the supply
voltage leads the current in an LCR series circuit, change as the
pu T supply frequency is gradually increased from very low to very
is
high values.
re ER
SA
bl 7.21 A device ‘X’ is connected to an a.c source. The variation of voltage,

current and power in one complete cycle is shown in Fig 7.5.
be C
(a) Which curve shows power consumption over a full cycle?

(b) What is the average power consumption over a cycle?
o N
(c) Identify the device ‘X’.
A
tt ©
B
v, i, P
C
t
Fig. 7.5
7.22 Both alternating current and direct current are measured in

amperes. But how is the ampere defined for an alternating
no
current?
7.23 A coil of 0.01 henry inductance and 1 ohm resistance is connected

to 200 volt, 50 Hz ac supply. Find the impedance of the circuit
and time lag between max. alternating voltage and current.
7.24 A 60 W load is connected to the secondary of a transformer whose

primary draws line voltage. If a current of 0.54 A flows in the
44
Alternating Current
load, what is the current in the primary coil? Comment on the

type of transformer being used.
7.25 Explain why the reactance provided by a capacitor to an

alternating current decreases with increasing frequency.
7.26 Explain why the reactance offered by an inductor increases with

increasing frequency of an alternating voltage.
LA
d
he
7.27 An electrical device draws 2kW power from AC mains (voltage
223V (rms) = 50,000 V). The current differs (lags) in phase by
φ ⎛⎜ tan φ =
–3 ⎞ as compared to voltage. Find (i) R, (ii) X – X , and
pu T
⎟
is
C L
⎝ 4 ⎠
re ER
(iii) IM. Another device has twice the values for R, XC and XL. How
are the answers affected?
7.28
bl
1MW power is to be delivered from a power station to a town
10 km away. One uses a pair of Cu wires of radius 0.5 cm for this
be C
purpose. Calculate the fraction of ohmic losses to power

transmitted if
o N
(i) power is transmitted at 220V. Comment on the feasibility of

doing this.
(ii) a step-up transformer is used to boost the voltage to
tt ©
11000 V, power transmitted, then a step-down transfomer is

used to bring voltage to 220 V.
R
(ρCu = 1.7 × 10 –8 SI unit)
i1
7.29 Consider the LCR circuit shown in Fig 7.6. Find the net i2
v C L
current i and the phase of i. Show that i = . Find the
Z C
i
impedence Z for this circuit.
vm sin wt
no
7.30 For an LCR circuit driven at frequency ω, the equation reads Fig. 7.6
di q
L + Ri + = vi = vm sin ωt
dt C
(i) Multiply the equation by i and simplify where possible.
(ii) Interpret each term physically.
45
(iii) Cast the equation in the form of a conservation of energy

statement.
(iv) Intergrate the equation over one cycle to find that the phase
difference between v and i must be acute.
7.31 In the LCR circuit shown in Fig 7.7, the ac driving voltage is
v = vm sin ωt.
(i) Write down the equation of motion for q (t).
d
(ii) At t = t0, the voltage source stops and R is short circuited. Now
write down how much energy is stored in each of L and C.
he
(iii) Describe subsequent motion of charges.
pu T
is
R L
re ER
bl C
be C
o N
Fig. 7.7
tt ©
no
46
Chapter Eight
ELECTROMAGNETIC
WAVES
d
he
pu T
is
re ER
bl
be C
o N
MCQ I
tt ©
8.1 One requires 11eV of energy to dissociate a carbon monoxide

molecule into carbon and oxygen atoms. The minimum frequency
of the appropriate electromagnetic radiation to achieve the
dissociation lies in
(a) visible region.
(b) infrared region.
(c) ultraviolet region.
(d) microwave region.
no
8.2 A linearly polarized electromagnetic wave given as

E = E o î cos (kz – ω t ) is incident normally on a perfectly reflecting
infinite wall at z = a. Assuming that the material of the wall is optically
inactive, the reflected wave will be given as
(a) Er = – E o î cos (kz – ω t ) .
(b) Er = E o î cos (kz + ω t ) .

(c) Er = – E o î cos (kz + ω t ) .

(d) E = E î sin (kz – ω t ) .
r o
8.3 Light with an energy flux of 20 W/cm2 falls on a non-reflecting

surface at normal incidence. If the surface has an area of 30 cm2.
the total momentum delivered (for complete absorption) during
30 minutes is
(a) 36 × 10–5 kg m/s.
d
(b) 36 × 10–4 kg m/s.
(c) 108 × 104 kg m/s.
he
(d) 1.08 × 107 kg m/s.
8.4 The electric field intensity produced by the radiations coming from
pu T 100 W bulb at a 3 m distance is E. The electric field intensity
is
produced by the radiations coming from 50 W bulb at the same
re ER
distance is
bl (a) E .
2
(b) 2E.
be C
(c) E
.
2
o N
(d) 2E .
8.5 If E and B represent electric and magnetic field vectors of the

tt ©
electromagnetic wave, the direction of propagation of electromagnetic

wave is along
(a) E.
(b) B.
(c) B × E.
(d) E × B.
8.6 The ratio of contributions made by the electric field and magnetic
field components to the intensity of an EM wave is
no
(a) c : 1
(b) c2 : 1
(c) 1 : 1
(d) c :1
8.7 An EM wave radiates outwards from a dipole antenna, with E0 as

the amplitude of its electric field vector. The electric field E0 which
48
Electromagnetic Waves
transports significant energy from the source falls off as

1
(a) r 3
1
(b) 2
r
1
(c)
r
(d) remains constant.
d
MCQ II
he
8.8 An electromognetic wave travels in vacuum along
z direction: E = ( E1î + E 2 ˆj ) cos (kz − ωt ) . Choose the correct options
pu T
from the following:
is
re ER
(a) The associated magnetic field is given as
B=
(b) The
1
c 1
bl
( E î – E 2 ˆj ) cos (kz-ωt).
associated magnetic field is given as
be C
B=
1
( E î – E2 ˆj ) cos (kz-ωt).
c 1
o N
(c) The given electromagnetic field is circularly polarised.

(d) The given electromagnetic wave is plane polarised.
tt ©
8.9 An electromagnetic wave travelling along z-axis is given as:

E = E 0 cos (kz - ωt.). Choose the correct options from the following;
1ˆ 1 ˆ
(a) The associated magnetic field is given as B =
k × E = (k × E) .
c ω
(b) The electromagnetic field can be written in terms of the
ˆ).
associated magnetic field as E = c ( B × k
ˆ . E = 0, k
(c) k ˆ . B=0.
ˆ × E = 0, k
(d) k ˆ × B=0.
no
8.10 A plane electromagnetic wave propagating along x direction can

have the following pairs of E and B
(a) Ex, By.
(b) Ey, Bz.
(c) Bx, Ey.
(d) Ez, By.
49
8.11 A charged particle oscillates about its mean equilibrium position

with a frequency of 109 Hz. The electromagnetic waves produced:
(a) will have frequency of 109 Hz.
(b) will have frequency of 2 × 109 Hz.
(c) will have a wavelength of 0.3 m.
(d) fall in the region of radiowaves.
8.12 The source of electromagnetic waves can be a charge
d
(a) moving with a constant velocity.
(b) moving in a circular orbit.
he
(c) at rest.
(d) falling in an electric field.
pu T 8.13 An EM wave of intensity I falls on a surface kept in vacuum and
is
exerts radiation pressure p on it. Which of the following are true?
re ER
(a) Radiation pressure is I/c if the wave is totally absorbed.
bl (b)
(c)
(b)
Radiation pressure is I/c if the wave is totally reflected.
Radiation pressure is 2I/c if the wave is totally reflected.
Radiation pressure is in the range I/c < p < 2I/c for real surfaces.
be C
VSA
o N
8.14 Why is the orientation of the portable radio with respect to

broadcasting station important?
8.15 Why does microwave oven heats up a food item containing water
tt ©
molecules most efficiently?
8.16 The charge on a parallel plate capacitor varies as q = q0 cos 2πνt.

The plates are very large and close together (area = A,
separation = d). Neglecting the edge effects, find the displacement
current through the capacitor?
8.17 A variable frequency a.c source is connected to a capacitor. How

will the displacement current change with decrease in frequency?
8.18 The magnetic field of a beam emerging from a filter facing a

no
floodlight is given by
B0 = 12 × 10–8 sin (1.20 × 107 z – 3.60 × 1015 t) T.
What is the average intensity of the beam?
8.19 Poynting vectors S is defined as a vector whose magnitude is equal

to the wave intensity and whose direction is along the direction of
1
wave propogation. Mathematically, it is given by S = E×B.
Show the nature of S vs t graph.
μ0
50
8.20 Professor C.V Raman surprised his students by suspending freely

a tiny light ball in a transparent vacuum chamber by shining a
laser beam on it. Which property of EM waves was he exhibiting?
Give one more example of this property.
SA
8.21 Show that the magnetic field B at a point in between the plates of
a parallel-plate capacitor during charging is ε 0 μr dE (symbols
d
2 dt
he
having usual meaning).
8.22 Electromagnetic waves with wavelength
pu T
(i) λ1 is used in satellite communication.
is
re ER
(ii) λ2 is used to kill germs in water purifies.
bl
(iii) λ3 is used to detect leakage of oil in underground pipelines.
(iv) λ4 is used to improve visibility in runways during fog and mist

be C
conditions.
o N
(a) Identify and name the part of electromagnetic spectrum to

which these radiations belong.
(b) Arrange these wavelengths in ascending order of their

tt ©
magnitude.
(c) Write one more application of each.
8.23 Show that average value of radiant flux density ‘S’ over a single
1
period ‘T’ is given by S = E 02 .
2cμ0
8.24 You are given a 2μF parallel plate capacitor. How would you
establish an instantaneous displacement current of 1mA in the
no
space between its plates?
8.25 Show that the radiation pressure exerted by an EM wave of

intensity I on a surface kept in vacuum is I/c.
8.26 What happens to the intensity of light from a bulb if the

distance from the bulb is doubled? As a laser beam travels across
the length of a room, its intensity essentially remains constant.
51
What geomatrical characteristic of LASER beam is responsible for

the constant intensity which is missing in the case of light from
the bulb?
8.27 Even though an electric field E exerts a force qE on a charged

particle yet the electric field of an EM wave does not contribute to
the radiation pressure (but transfers energy). Explain.
LA
d
Z
a 8.28 An infinitely long thin wire carrying a uniform linear static charge
he
density λ is placed along the z-axis (Fig. 8.1). The wire is set into
ˆ . Calculate
motion along its length with a uniform velocity v = v k z
pu T
is
1
y the poynting vector S = (E × B).
re ER
μo
x
V
bl8.29 Sea water at frequency ν = 4 × 108 Hz has permittivity ε ≈ 80 εo,

permeability μ ≈ μo and resistivity ρ = 0.25 Ω–m. Imagine a parallel
plate capacitor immersed in sea water and driven by an alternating
voltage source V(t) = Vo sin (2π νt). What fraction of the conduction
be C
current density is the displacement current density?

o N
Fig. 8.1 8.30 A long straight cable of length l is placed symmetrically along
z-axis and has radius a(<<l). The cable consists of a thin wire and
a co-axial conducting tube. An alternating current I(t) = Io sin (2πνt)
flows down the central thin wire and returns along the co-axial
tt ©
conducting tube. The induced electric field at a distance s from

⎛s⎞ˆ
the wire inside the cable is E (s,t ) = μo I o νcos (2πνt ) In ⎜ ⎟ k.
⎝a ⎠
(i) Calculate the displacement current density inside the cable.

(ii) Integrate the displacement current density across the cross-
section of the cable to find the total displacement current Id.
(iii) Compare the conduction current I0 with the dispalcement
current I od .
no
8.31 A plane EM wave travelling in vacuum along z direction is given

by E = E 0 sin(kz – ωt )î and B = B0 sin(kz – ωt )ˆj .
(i) Evaluate ∫ E.dl over the rectangular loop 1234 shown in

Fig 8.2.
(ii) Evaluate ∫ B.ds over the surface bounded by loop 1234.
52
–dφB E0 x
(iii) Use equation
dt ∫ E.dl =
to prove B = c .
0
(iv) By using similar process and the equation

4 3
dφ 1
∫ B.dl = μ0 I + ε 0 dtE , prove that c = μ0 ε 0 h
8.32 A plane EM wave travelling along z direction is described

1 2 z
d
by E = E 0 sin(kz – ωt )î and B = B0 sin(kz – ωt )ˆj . Show
that
he
y Fig. 8.2
(i) The average energy density of the wave is given by
1 1 B20
u av = ε 0 E 02 +
pu T 4 μ0
.
is
4
re ER
(ii) The time averaged intensity of the wave is given by
bl
1
I av = cε 0 E 02 .
2
be C
o N
tt ©
no
53
Chapter Nine
RAY OPTICS AND

OPTICAL
d
he
INSTRUMENTS pu T
is
re ER
bl
be C
o N
MCQ I
tt ©
9.1 A ray of light incident at an angle θ on a refracting face of a prism

emerges from the other face normally. If the angle of the prism is 5°
and the prism is made of a material of refractive index 1.5, the angle
of incidence is
(a) 7.5°.
(b) 5°.
(c) 15°.
(d) 2.5°.
no
9.2 A short pulse of white light is incident from air to a glass slab at
normal incidence. After travelling through the slab, the first colour
to emerge is
(a) blue.
(b) green.
(c) violet.
(d) red.
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
9.3 An object approaches a convergent lens from the left of the lens
with a uniform speed 5 m/s and stops at the focus. The image
(a) moves away from the lens with an uniform speed 5 m/s.
(b) moves away from the lens with an uniform accleration.
(c) moves away from the lens with a non-uniform acceleration.
(d) moves towards the lens with a non-uniform acceleration.
9.4 A passenger in an aeroplane shall
d
(a) never see a rainbow.
(b) may see a primary and a secondary rainbow as concentric circles.
he
(c) may see a primary and a secondary rainbow as concentric arcs.
(d) shall never see a secondary rainbow.
9.5
pu T
You are given four sources of light each one providing a light of a
is
single colour – red, blue, green and yellow. Suppose the angle of
re ER
refraction for a beam of yellow light corresponding to a particular
angle of incidence at the interface of two media is 90°. Which of the
bl
following statements is correct if the source of yellow light is replaced
with that of other lights without changing the angle of incidence?
(a) The beam of red light would undergo total internal reflection.
be C
(b) The beam of red light would bend towards normal while it gets
refracted through the second medium.
o N
(c) The beam of blue light would undergo total internal reflection.
(d) The beam of green light would bend away from the normal as it
gets refracted through the second medium.
tt ©
9.6 The radius of curvature of the curved surface of a plano-convex

lens is 20 cm. If the refractive index of the material of the lens be
1.5, it will
(a) act as a convex lens only for the objects that lie on its curved
side.
(b) act as a concave lens for the objects that lie on its curved side.
(c) act as a convex lens irrespective of the side on which the object
lies.
(d) act as a concave lens irrespective of side on which the object lies.
no
9.7 The phenomena involved in the reflection of radiowaves by

ionosphere is similar to
(a) reflection of light by a plane mirror.
(b) total internal reflection of light in air during a mirage.
(c) dispersion of light by water molecules during the formation of a
rainbow.
(d) scattering of light by the particles of air.
55
1
9.8 The direction of ray of light incident on a concave mirror is shown
2
Q 4 by PQ while directions in which the ray would travel after reflection
is shown by four rays marked 1, 2, 3 and 4
(Fig 9.1). Which of the four rays correctly shows the direction of
reflected ray?
(a) 1
C F
(b) 2
(c) 3
d
3 P (d) 4
he
9.9 The optical density of turpentine is higher than that of water while
Fig. 9.1 its mass density is lower. Fig 9.2. shows a layer of turpentine
floating over water in a container. For which one of the four rays
pu T incident on turpentine in Fig 9.2, the path shown is correct?
is
(a) 1
re ER
(b) 2
bl
(c) 3
(d) 4
be C
1 2 3 4
o N
Air
Turpentine
Water
tt ©
Fig. 9.2
9.10 A car is moving with at a constant speed of 60 km h–1 on a straight

road. Looking at the rear view mirror, the driver finds that the car
following him is at a distance of 100 m and is approaching with a
speed of 5 km h –1. In order to keep track of the car in the rear, the
driver begins to glance alternatively at the rear and side mirror of
his car after every 2 s till the other car overtakes. If the two cars
were maintaining their speeds, which of the following statement
(s) is/are correct?
no
(a) The speed of the car in the rear is 65 km h–1.

(b) In the side mirror the car in the rear would appear to approach
with a speed of 5 km h–1 to the driver of the leading car.
(c) In the rear view mirror the speed of the approaching car would
appear to decrease as the distance between the cars decreases.
(d) In the side mirror, the speed of the approaching car would
appear to increase as the distance between the cars decreases.
56
9.11 There are certain material developed in laboratories which have a

negative refractive index (Fig. 9.3). A ray incident from air (medium 1)
into such a medium (medium 2) shall follow a path given by
i 1 i 1
r 2 r
2
(a) (b)
d
he
i r 1 1
2 2
pu T
(c) (d)
is
Fig. 9.3
re ER
MCQ II
9.12
bl
Consider an extended object immersed in water contained in a
be C
plane trough. When seen from close to the edge of the trough the
object looks distorted because
o N
(a) the apparent depth of the points close to the edge are nearer
the surface of the water compared to the points away from the
edge.
tt ©
(b) the angle subtended by the image of the object at the eye is
smaller than the actual angle subtended by the object in air.
(c) some of the points of the object far away from the edge may
not be visible because of total internal reflection.
(d) water in a trough acts as a lens and magnifies the object.
A B
9.13 A rectangular block of glass ABCD has a refractive index 1.6.
A pin is placed midway on the face AB (Fig. 9.4). When observed
from the face AD, the pin shall
(a) appear to be near A.
no
(b) appear to be near D.

(c) appear to be at the centre of AD.
(d) not be seen at all. D C
Fig. 9.4
9.14 Between the primary and secondary rainbows, there is a dark
band known as Alexandar’s dark band. This is because
(a) light scattered into this region interfere destructively.
(b) there is no light scattered into this region.
57
(c) light is absorbed in this region.

(d) angle made at the eye by the scattered rays with respect to the
incident light of the sun lies between approximately 42° and
50°.
9.15 A magnifying glass is used, as the object to be viewed can be
brought closer to the eye than the normal near point. This
results in
(a) a larger angle to be subtended by the object at the eye and
d
hence viewed in greater detail.
(b) the formation of a virtual erect image.
he
(c) increase in the field of view.
(d) infinite magnification at the near point.
pu T 9.16 An astronomical refractive telescope has an objective of focal length
is
20m and an eyepiece of focal length 2cm.
re ER
(a) The length of the telescope tube is 20.02m.
bl
(b) The magnification is 1000.
(c) The image formed is inverted.
(d) An objective of a larger aperture will increase the brightness
and reduce chromatic aberration of the image.
be C
VSA
o N
9.17 Will the focal length of a lens for red light be more, same or less
than that for blue light?
tt ©
9.18 The near vision of an average person is 25cm. To view an object

with an angular magnification of 10, what should be the power of
the microscope?
9.19 An unsymmetrical double convex thin lens forms the image of a

point object on its axis. Will the position of the image change if
the lens is reversed?
9.20 Three immiscible liquids of densities d1 > d2 > d3 and refractive

indices μ1 > μ2 > μ3 are put in a beaker. The height of each liquid
no
h
column is . A dot is made at the bottom of the beaker. For near
3
normal vision, find the apparent depth of the dot.
9.21 For a glass prism ( μ = 3 ) the angle of minimum deviation is

equal to the angle of the prism. Find the angle of the prism.
58
SA
9.22 A short object of length L is placed along the principal axis of a
concave mirror away from focus. The object distance is u. If the
mirror has a focal length f, what will be the length of the image?
You may take L <<|v - f|.
a
a O a M
9.23 A circular disc of radius ‘R’ is placed co-axially and horizontally a
inside an opaque hemispherical bowl of radius ‘a’ (Fig. 9.5). The d a
d
a i
far edge of the disc is just visible when viewed from the edge of the -a
90
bowl. The bowl is filled with transparent liquid of refractive index A R C R B
he
μ and the near edge of the disc becomes just visible. How far below
the top of the bowl is the disc placed?
Fig. 9.5
9.24
pu T
A thin convex lens of focal length 25 cm is cut into two pieces
is
0.5 cm above the principal axis. The top part is placed at (0,0) and
re ER
an object placed at (–50 cm, 0). Find the coordinates of the image.
9.25
bl
In many experimental set-ups the source and screen are fixed at
a distance say D and the lens is movable. Show that there are two
positions for the lens for which an image is formed on the screen.
be C
Find the distance between these points and the ratio of the image
sizes for these two points.
o N
9.26 A jar of height h is filled with a transparent liquid of refractive

index μ (Fig. 9.6). At the centre of the jar on the bottom surface is
a dot. Find the minimum diameter of a disc, such that when placed
tt ©
on the top surface symmetrically about the centre, the dot is

invisible.
d
h
i i
no
Fig. 9.6
9.27 A myopic adult has a far point at 0.1 m. His power of accomodation
is 4 diopters. (i) What power lenses are required to see distant
59
objects? (ii) What is his near point without glasses? (iii) What is
his near point with glasses? (Take the image distance from the
lens of the eye to the retina to be 2 cm.)
LA
9.28 Show that for a material with refractive index μ ≥ 2 , light incident
at any angle shall be guided along a length perpendicular to the
incident face.
d
9.29 The mixture a pure liquid and a solution in a long vertical column
he
(i.e, horizontal dimensions << vertical dimensions) produces
diffusion of solute particles and hence a refractive index gradient
along the vertical dimension. A ray of light entering the column at
pu T
is
right angles to the vertical is deviated from its original path. Find
the deviation in travelling a horizontal distance d << h, the height
re ER
of the column.
bl 9.30 If light passes near a massive object, the gravitational interaction

causes a bending of the ray. This can be thought of as happening
due to a change in the effective refrative index of the medium
be C
given by
o N
n(r) = 1 + 2 GM/rc2
where r is the distance of the point of consideration from the centre

of the mass of the massive body, G is the universal gravitational
tt ©
constant, M the mass of the body and c the speed of light in

vacuum. Considering a spherical object find the deviation of the
ray from the original path as it grazes the object.
y
9.31 An infinitely long cylinder of radius R is made of an unusual exotic
material with refractive index –1 (Fig. 9.7). The cylinder is placed
between two planes whose normals are along the y direction. The
center of the cylinder O lies along the y-axis. A narrow laser beam
qi
o R is directed along the y direction from the lower plate. The laser
qr source is at a horizontal distance x from the diameter in the
x
y direction. Find the range of x such that light emitted from the
no
qi lower plane does not reach the upper plane.

x
Fig. 9.7 9.32 (i) Consider a thin lens placed between a source (S) and an
observer (O) (Fig. 9.8). Let the thickness of the lens vary as
b2
w(b ) = w0 – , where b is the verticle distance from the pole.
α
w0 is a constant. Using Fermat’s principle i.e. the time of transit
60
for a ray between the source and observer is an P1

extremum, find the condition that all paraxial rays
b
starting from the source will converge at a point O
S u v O
on the axis. Find the focal length.
(ii) A gravitational lens may be assumed to have a varying Fig. 9.8

width of the form
⎛k ⎞
w(b ) = k1ln ⎜ 2 ⎟ bmin < b < bmax
⎝b ⎠
d
⎛ k ⎞
he
= k1ln ⎜ 2 ⎟ b < bmin
⎝ b min ⎠
pu T
Show that an observer will see an image of a point object as a
is
ring about the center of the lens with an angular radius
re ER
u
(n – 1) k1
bl
β= v .
u +v
be C
o N
tt ©
no
61
Chapter Ten
WAVE OPTICS
d
he
pu T
is
re ER
bl
be C
o N
MCQ I
tt ©
10.1 Consider a light beam incident from air to a glass slab at Brewster’s
angle as shown in Fig. 10.1.
A polaroid is placed in the path of the emergent ray at point P
and rotated about an axis passing through the centre
and perpendicular to the plane of the polaroid.
(a) For a particular orientation there shall be darkness
as observed through the polaoid.
(b) The intensity of light as seen through the polaroid
shall be independent of the rotation.
no
(c) The intensity of light as seen through the Polaroid

shall go through a minimum but not zero for two
orientations of the polaroid.
(d) The intensity of light as seen through the polaroid shall
go through a minimum for four orientations of the Fig. 10.1 P
polaroid.
10.2 Consider sunlight incident on a slit of width 104 A. The image
seen through the slit shall
Wave Optics
(a) be a fine sharp slit white in colour at the center.

(b) a bright slit white at the center diffusing to zero intensities at
the edges.
(c) a bright slit white at the center diffusing to regions of different
colours.
(d) only be a diffused slit white in colour.
10.3 Consider a ray of light incident from air onto a slab of glass
(refractive index n) of width d, at an angle θ. The phase difference
d
between the ray reflected by the top surface of the glass and the
bottom surface is
he
1/2
4 πd ⎛ 1 2 ⎞
(a) ⎜1 – 2 sin θ ⎟ +π
λ ⎝ n ⎠
pu T
is
1/ 2
4 πd ⎛ 1 2 ⎞
⎜1 – 2 sin θ ⎟
re ER
(b)
λ ⎝ n ⎠
(c)
4πd ⎛
λ ⎝
bl
1 2 ⎞
⎜1 – 2 sin θ ⎟
n ⎠
1/2
+
π
2
be C
1/2
4 πd ⎛ 1 2 ⎞
(d) ⎜1 – 2 sin θ ⎟ + 2π .
λ ⎝ n ⎠
o N
10.4 In a Young’s double slit experiment, the source is white light. One
of the holes is covered by a red filter and another by a blue filter.
In this case
tt ©
(a) there shall be alternate interference patterns of red and blue.

(b) there shall be an interference pattern for red distinct from that
for blue.
(c) there shall be no interference fringes.
(d) there shall be an interference pattern for red mixing with one
for blue.
10.5 Figure 10.2 shows a standard two slit

arrangement with slits S1, S2. P1, P2 are the two Screen
no
minima points on either side of P (Fig. 10.2). S1

P1
At P2 on the screen, there is a hole and behind P2
S
is a second 2- slit arrangement with slits S3, S4 P
S3
and a second screen behind them.
S2 P2 S4 Second
(a) There would be no interference pattern on the Screen
second screen but it would be lighted.
(b) The second screen would be totally dark.
Fig. 10.2
63
(c) There would be a single bright point on the second screen.

(d) There would be a regular two slit pattern on the second screen.
MCQ II
10.6 Two source S1 and S2 of intensity I1 and I2 are placed in front of a
S1
screen [Fig. 10.3 (a)]. The patteren of intensity distribution seen
x
S2
in the central portion is given by Fig. 10.3 (b).
In this case which of the following statements are true.
d
Fig. 10.3 (a) (a) S1 and S2 have the same intensities.
he
(b) S1 and S2 have a constant phase difference.
(c) S1 and S2 have the same phase.
(d) S1 and S2 have the same wavelength.
pu T
is
10.7 Consider sunlight incident on a pinhole of width 103A. The image
of the pinhole seen on a screen shall be
re ER
bl
x=0 x (a) a sharp white ring.
Fig. 10.3 (b) (b) different from a geometrical image.
(c) a diffused central spot, white in colour.
(d) diffused coloured region around a sharp central white spot.
be C
10.8 Consider the diffraction patern for a small pinhole. As the size of
o N
the hole is increased

(a) the size decreases.
(b) the intensity increases.
tt ©
(c) the size increases.

(d) the intensity decreases.
10.9 For light diverging from a point source
(a) the wavefront is spherical.
(b) the intensity decreases in proportion to the distance squared.
(c) the wavefront is parabolic.
(d) the intensity at the wavefront does not depend on the distance.
VSA
no
10.10 Is Huygen’s principle valid for longitudunal sound waves?
10.11 Consider a point at the focal point of a convergent lens. Another

convergent lens of short focal length is placed on the other side.
What is the nature of the wavefronts emerging from the final image?
10.12 What is the shape of the wavefront on earth for sunlight?
64
Wave Optics
10.13 Why is the diffraction of sound waves more evident in daily

experience than that of light wave?
10.14 The human eye has an approximate angular resolution of

φ = 5.8 × 10 –4 rad and a typical photoprinter prints a minimum
of 300 dpi (dots per inch, 1 inch = 2.54 cm). At what minimal
distance z should a printed page be held so that one does not see
the individual dots.
d
10.15 A polariod (I) is placed in front of a monochromatic source.
Another polatiod (II) is placed in front of this polaroid (I) and
he
rotated till no light passes. A third polaroid (III) is now placed in
between (I) and (II). In this case, will light emerge from (II). Explain.
SA
pu T
is
re ER
10.16 Can reflection result in plane polarised light if the light is incident
10.17
bl
on the interface from the side with higher refractive index?
For the same objective, find the ratio of the least separation
between two points to be distinguished by a microscope for light
be C
o
of 5000 A and electrons accelerated through 100V used as the
illuminating substance.
o N
10.18 Consider a two slit interference arrangements (Fig. 10.4) such

that the distance of the screen from the slits is half the distance
tt ©
between the slits. Obtain the value of D in terms of λ such

that the first minima on the screen falls at a distance D from the
centre O.
S1 T1 OP = x
P CO = D
Source
O S1C = CS2 = D
S C
S2 T2
Screen
Fig. 10.4
no
LA S1
1
10.19 Figure 10.5 shown a two slit arrangement with a source which S
emits unpolarised light. P is a polariser with axis whose direction 2
P S2
is not given. If I0 is the intensity of the principal maxima when no
polariser is present, calculate in the present case, the intensity of
the principal maxima as well as of the first minima. Fig. 10.5
65
S1
P1
A q O
C
10.20 L=
d/ S2 Screen
4
d
Fig. 10.6
AC = CO = D, S1C = S2C = d << D
he
A small transparent slab containing material of μ = 1.5 is placed
pu T along AS2 (Fig.10.6). What will be the distance from O of the
is
principal maxima and of the first minima on either side of the
re ER
principal maxima obtained in the absence of the glass slab. .
bl 10.21 Four identical monochromatic sources A,B,C,D as shown in the

(Fig.10.7) produce waves of the same wavelength λ and are
be C
coherent. Two receiver R1 and R2 are at great but equal distaces

from B.
o N
(i) Which of the two receivers picks up the larger signal?

(ii) Which of the two receivers picks up the larger signal when B
is turned off?
(iii) Which of the two receivers picks up the larger signal when D
tt ©
is turned off?
(iv) Which of the two receivers can distinguish which of the sources
B or D has been turned off?
R2
l/2 l/2
no
R1 A B C
R1B = d = R2B l/2

AB = BC = BD = λ/2
D
Fig. 10.7
66
Wave Optics
10.22 The optical properties of a medium are governed by the relative

permitivity (εr ) and relative permeability (μr ). The refractive index
is defined as μr εr = n. For ordinary material εr > 0 and μr > 0 and

the positive sign is taken for the square root. In 1964, a Russian
scientist V. Veselago postulated the existence of material with εr
< 0 and μr < 0. Since then such ‘metamaterials’ have been
produced in the laboratories and their optical properties studied.
For such materials n = – μr εr . As light enters a medium of such
d
refractive index the phases travel away from the direction of
he
propagation.
(i) According to the description above show that if rays of light
pu T
is
enter such a medium from air (refractive index =1) at an angle
θ in 2nd quadrant, them the refracted beam is in the 3rd quadrant.
re ER
(ii) Prove that Snell’s law holds for such a medium.
bl
10.23 To ensure almost 100 per cent transmittivity, photographic lenses
are often coated with a thin layer of dielectric material. The refractive
be C
index of this material is intermediated between that of air and glass

(which makes the optical element of the lens). A typically used
dielectric film is MgF2 (n = 1.38). What should the thickness of the
o N
o
film be so that at the center of the visible speetrum (5500 A ) there
is maximum transmission.
tt ©
no
67
Chapter Eleven
DUAL NATURE OF
RADIATION AND
d
he
MATTER pu T
is
re ER
bl
be C
o N
MCQ I
tt ©
11.1 A particle is dropped from a height H. The de Broglie wavelength

of the particle as a function of height is proportional to
(a) H
(b) H 1/2
(c) H0
(b) H –1/2
11.2 The wavelength of a photon needed to remove a proton from a
nucleus which is bound to the nucleus with 1 MeV energy is nearly
no
(a) 1.2 nm
(b) 1.2 × 10–3 nm
(c) 1.2 × 10–6 nm
(d) 1.2 × 101 nm
11.3 Consider a beam of electrons (each electron with energy E0) incident
on a metal surface kept in an evacuated chamber. Then
Dual Nature of Radiation
and Matter
(a) no electrons will be emitted as only photons can emit electrons.

(b) electrons can be emitted but all with an energy, E0.
(c) electrons can be emitted with any energy, with a maximum of
E0 – φ (φ is the work function).
(d) electrons can be emitted with any energy, with a maximum of
E0.
11.4 Consider Fig. 11.7 in the NCERT text book of physics for Class
XII. Suppose the voltage applied to A is increased. The diffracted
beam will have the maximum at a value of θ that
d
(a) will be larger than the earlier value.
he
(b) will be the same as the earlier value.
(c) will be less than the earlier value.
pu T
(d) will depend on the target.
is
11.5 A proton, a neutron, an electron and an α-particle have same
re ER
energy. Then their de Broglie wavelengths compare as
bl
(a) λp = λn > λe > λα
(b) λα < λp = λn > λe
(c) λe < λp = λn > λα
be C
(d) λe = λp = λn = λα
o N
11.6 An electron is moving with an initial velocity v = v 0 î and is in a

magnetic field B = B ˆj . Then it’s de Broglie wavelength
0
(a) remains constant.

tt ©
(b) increases with time.

(c) decreases with time.
(d) increases and decreases periodically.
11.7 An electron (mass m) with an initial velocity v = v 0î (v 0 > 0) is in

an electric field E = – E î(E = constant > 0 ) . It’s de Broglie
0 0
wavelength at time t is given by
λ0
no
(a)
⎛ eE 0 t ⎞
⎜1 + m v ⎟
⎝ 0 ⎠
⎛ eE 0t ⎞
(b) λ0 ⎜1 + mv ⎟
⎝ 0 ⎠
(c) λ0
(d) λ0t.
69
11.8 An electron (mass m) with an initial velocity v = v 0 î is in an

electric field E = E 0 ˆj . If λ0 = h/mv0, it’s de Breoglie wavelength at
time t is given by
(a) λ0
e 2 E 02t 2
(b) λ0 1 +
m 2v 02
λ0
d
(c)
e 2 E 02t 2
1+
he
m 2v 02
λ0
pu T
is
(d) ⎛ e 2 E 02t 2 ⎞
⎜1 + ⎟
re ER
⎝ m 2v 02 ⎠
bl MCQ II
be C
11.9 Relativistic corrections become neccssary when the expression

1 2
for the kinetic energy mv , becomes comparable with mc2,
o N
2
where m is the mass of the particle. At what de Broglie wavelength
will relativistic corrections become important for an electron?
(a) λ =10nm
tt ©
(b) λ =10–1nm
(c) λ =10–4nm
(d) λ =10–6nm
11.10 Two particles A1 sand A2 of masses m1, m2 (m1 > m2) have the same
de Broglie wavelength. Then
(a) their momenta are the same.
(b) their energies are the same.
(c) energy of A1 is less than the energy of A2.
no
(d) energy of A1 is more than the energy of A2.
11.11 The de Broglie wavelength of a photon is twice the de Broglie

c
wavelength of an electron. The speed of the electron is ve = .
100
Then
70
and Matter
Ee
(a) E = 10
–4
Ee
(b) E = 10
–2
pe
(c) m c = 10
–2
pe
d
(d) m c = 10 .
–4
he
11.12 Photons absorbed in matter are converted to heat. A source
emitting n photon/sec of frequency ν is used to convert 1kg of
pu T
ice at 0°C to water at 0°C. Then, the time T taken for the
is
conversion
re ER
(a) decreases with increasing n, with ν fixed.
bl
(b) decreases with n fixed, ν increasing
(c) remains constant with n and ν changing such that
nν = constant.
be C
(d) increases when the product nν increases.

11.13 A particle moves in a closed orbit around the origin, due to a
o N
force which is directed towards the origin. The de Broglie

wavelength of the particle varies cyclically between two values λ1,
λ2 with λ1>λ2. Which of the following statement are true?
tt ©
(a) The particle could be moving in a circular orbit with origin as

centre
(b) The particle could be moving in an elliptic orbit with origin as
its focus.
(c) When the de Broglie wave length is λ1, the particle is nearer
the origin than when its value is λ2.
(d) When the de Broglic wavelength is λ2, the particle is nearer
the origin than when its value is λ1.
no
VSA
11.14 A proton and an α-particle are accelerated, using the same
potential difference. How are the deBroglie wavelengths λp and
λa related to each other?
11.15 (i) In the explanation of photo electric effect, we asssume one

photon of frequency ν collides with an electron and transfers
71
its energy. This leads to the equation for the maximum energy
Emax of the emitted electron as
Emax = hν – φ0
where φ0 is the work function of the metal. If an electron

absorbs 2 photons (each of frequency ν ) what will be the
maximum energy for the emitted electron?
(ii) Why is this fact (two photon absorption) not taken into
d
consideration in our discussion of the stopping potential?
he
11.16 There are materials which absorb photons of shorter wavelength
and emit photons of longer wavelength. Can there be stable
pu T substances which absorb photons of larger wavelength and emit
is
light of shorter wavelength.
re ER
bl
11.17 Do all the electrons that absorb a photon come out as
photoelectrons?
11.18 There are two sources of light, each emitting with a power of
be C
100 W. One emits X-rays of wavelength 1nm and the other visible
light at 500 nm. Find the ratio of number of photons of X-rays to
o N
electron
the photons of visible light of the given wavelength?
SA
tt ©
11.19 Consider Fig.11.1 for photoemission.
How would you reconcile with momentum-conservation? Note

light light (photons) have momentum in a different direction than the
emitted electrons.
metal 11.20 Consider a metal exposed to light of wavelength 600 nm. The
maximum energy of the electron doubles when light of
wavelength 400 snm is used. Find the work function in eV.
Fig. 11.1
11.21 Assuming an electron is confined to a 1nm wide region , find the
no
uncertainty in momentum using Heisenberg Uncertainty

principle (Ref Eq 11.12 of NCERT Textbook). You can assume
the uncertainty in position Δx as 1nm. Assuming p Δp , find
the energy of the electron in electron volts.
11.22 Two monochromatic beams A and B of equal intensity I, hit a

screen. The number of photons hitting the screen by beam A is
72
and Matter
twice that by beam B. Then what inference can you make about
their frequencies?
11.23 Two particles A and B of de Broglie wavelengths λ1 and λ2 combine

to form a particle C. The process conserves momentum. Find the
de Broglie wavelength of the particle C. (The motion is one
dimensional).
11.24 A neutron beam of energy E scatters from atoms on a surface
d
with a spacing d = 0.1nm. The first maximum of intensity in the
reflected beam occurs at θ = 30°. What is the kinetic energy E of
he
the beam in eV?
LA
pu T
is
re ER
11.25 Consider a thin target (10–2m square, 10–3m thickness) of sodium,
which produces a photocurrent of 100μA when a light of intensity
bl
100W/m2 (λ = 660nm) falls on it. Find the probability that a
photoelectron is produced when a photons strikes a sodium
atom. [Take density of Na = 0.97 kg/m3].
be C
11.26 Consider an electron in front of metallic surface at a distance d

o N
(treated as an infinite plane surface). Assume the force of attraction

1 q2
by the plate is given as
4 4πε 0d 2
tt ©
Calculate work in taking the charge to an infinite distance from

the plate. Taking d = 0.1nm, find the work done in electron volts.
[Such a force law is not valid for d < 0.1nm].
11.27 A student performs an experiment on photoelectric Vstop

(V) A B
effect, using two materials A and B. A plot of Vstop vs
ν is given in Fig. 11.2. 3
2.5
(i) Which material A or B has a higher work 2
function? 1.5
no
(ii) Given the electric charge of an electron 1

= 1.6 × 10–19 C, find the value of h obtained from
the experiment for both A and B. 14 14
5 × 10 10 × 10 15 × 10
14
Comment on whether it is consistent with Frequency (Hz)

Einstein’s theory:
Fig. 11.2
11.28 A particle A with a mass mA is moving with a velocity v and hits
a particle B (mass mB) at rest (one dimensional motion). Find the
73
change in the de Broglic wavelength of the particle A. Treat the

collision as elastic.
°
11.29 Consider a 20 W bulb emitting light of wavelength 5000 A and
shining on a metal surface kept at a distance 2m. Assume that
the metal surface has work function of 2 eV and that each atom
on the metal surface can be treated as a circular disk of radius
°
1.5 A .
d
(i) Estimate no. of photons emitted by the bulb per second.
[Assume no other losses]
he
(ii) Will there be photoelectric emission?
(iii) How much time would be required by the atomc disk to receive
energy equal to work function (2 eV)?
pu T
is
(iv) How many photons would atomic disk receive within time
duration calculated in (iii) above?
re ER
(v) Can you explain how photoelectric effect was observed
bl instantaneously?
[Hint: Time calculated in part (iii) is from classical consideration

be C
and you may further take the target of surface area say 1cm2
and estimate what would happen?]
o N
tt ©
no
74
Atoms
Chapter Twelve
ATOMS
d
he
pu T
is
re ER
bl
be C
o N
MCQ I
tt ©
12.1 Taking the Bohr radius as a0 = 53pm, the radius of Li++ ion in its
ground state, on the basis of Bohr’s model, will be about
(a) 53 pm
(b) 27 pm
(c) 18 pm
(d) 13 pm
12.2 The binding energy of a H-atom, considering an electron moving
me 4
no
around a fixed nuclei (proton), is B = – . (m = electron

8n 2ε 02h 2
mass).
If one decides to work in a frame of reference where the electron is
at rest, the proton would be moving arround it. By similar
arguments, the binding energy would be
Me 4
B=– (M = proton mass)
8n 2ε 02h 2
75
This last expression is not correct because

(a) n would not be integral.
(b) Bohr-quantisation applies only to electron
(c) the frame in which the electron is at rest is not inertial.
(d) the motion of the proton would not be in circular orbits, even
approximately.
12.3 The simple Bohr model cannot be directly applied to calculate the
energy levels of an atom with many electrons. This is because
d
(a) of the electrons not being subject to a central force.
(b) of the electrons colliding with each other
he
(c) of screening effects
(d) the force between the nucleus and an electron will no longer
be given by Coulomb’s law.
pu T
is
12.4 For the ground state, the electron in the H-atom has an angular
re ER
momentum = h , according to the simple Bohr model. Angular
momentum is a vector and hence there will be infinitely many
bl orbits with the vector pointing in all possible directions. In

actuality, this is not true,
(a) because Bohr model gives incorrect values of angular
be C
momentum.
(b) because only one of these would have a minimum energy.
o N
(c) angular momentum must be in the direction of spin of electron.

(d) because electrons go around only in horizontal orbits.
12.5 O2 molecule consists of two oxygen atoms. In the molecule, nuclear
tt ©
force between the nuclei of the two atoms

(a) is not important because nuclear forces are short-ranged.
(b) is as important as electrostatic force for binding the two atoms.
(c) cancels the repulsive electrostatic force between the nuclei.
(d) is not important because oxygen nucleus have equal number
of neutrons and protons.
12.6 Two H atoms in the ground state collide inelastically. The
maximum amount by which their combined kinetic energy is
reduced is
(a) 10.20 eV
no
(b) 20.40 eV
(c) 13.6 eV
(d) 27.2 eV
12.7 A set of atoms in an excited state decays.
(a) in general to any of the states with lower energy.
(b) into a lower state only when excited by an external electric
field.
76
Atoms
(c) all together simultaneously into a lower state.

(d) to emit photons only when they collide.
MCQ II
12.8 An ionised H-molecule consists of an electron and two protons.
The protons are separated by a small distance of the order of
angstrom. In the ground state,
d
(a) the electron would not move in circular orbits.
(b) the energy would be (2)4 times that of a H-atom.
he
(c) the electrons, orbit would go arround the protons.
(d) the molecule will soon decay in a proton and a H-atom.
pu T
is
12.9 Consider aiming a beam of free electrons towards free protons.
re ER
When they scatter, an electron and a proton cannot combine to
bl
produce a H-atom,
(a) because of energy conservation.
(b) without simultaneously releasing energy in the from of
be C
radiation.
(c) because of momentum conservation.
(d) because of angular momentum conservation.
o N
12.10 The Bohr model for the spectra of a H-atom

(a) will not be applicable to hydrogen in the molecular from.
tt ©
(b) will not be applicable as it is for a He-atom.

(c) is valid only at room temperature.
(d) predicts continuous as well as discrete spectral lines.
12.11 The Balmer series for the H-atom can be observed
(a) if we measure the frequencies of light emitted when an excited
atom falls to the ground state.
(b) if we measure the frequencies of light emitted due to
transitions between excited states and the first excited state.
(c) in any transition in a H-atom.
no
(d) as a sequence of frequencies with the higher frequencies

getting closely packed.
−1 me 4
12.12 Let En = be the energy of the nth level of H-atom. If all
8ε 02 n 2h 2
the H-atoms are in the ground state and radiation of frequency
(E2-E1)/h falls on it,
(a) it will not be absorbed at all
77
(b) some of atoms will move to the first excited state.

(c) all atoms will be excited to the n = 2 state.
(d) no atoms will make a transition to the n = 3 state.
12.13 The simple Bohr modle is not applicable to He4 atom because
(a) He4 is an inert gas.
(b) He4 has neutrons in the nucleus.
(c) He4 has one more electron.
d
(d) electrons are not subject to central forces.
he
VSA
12.14 The mass of a H-atom is less than the sum of the masses of a
pu T proton and electron. Why is this?
is
re ER
4 3
12.15 Imagine removing one electron from He and He . Their energy
bl
levels, as worked out on the basis of Bohr model will be very
close. Explain why.
12.16 When an electron falls from a higher energy to a lower energy

be C
level, the difference in the energies appears in the form of

electromagnetic radiation. Why cannot it be emitted as other
forms of energy?
o N
12.17 Would the Bohr formula for the H-atom remain unchanged if
proton had a charge (+4/3)e and electron a charge ( −3 / 4 ) e ,
tt ©
where e = 1.6 × 10–19C. Give reasons for your answer.
12.18 Consider two different hydrogen atoms. The electron in each atom
is in an excited state. Is it possible for the electrons to have
different energies but the same orbital angular momentum
according to the Bohr model?
SA
12.19 Positronium is just like a H-atom with the proton replaced by
no
the positively charged anti-particle of the electron (called the

positron which is as massive as the electron). What would be the
ground state energy of positronium?
12.20 Assume that there is no repulsive force between the electrons in

an atom but the force between positive and negative charges is
given by Coulomb’s law as usual. Under such circumstances,
calculate the ground state energy of a He-atom.
78
Atoms
12.21 Using Bohr model, calculate the electric current created by the
electron when the H-atom is in the ground state.
12.22 Show that the first few frequencies of light that is emitted when
electrons fall to the nth level from levels higher than n, are
approximate harmonics (i.e. in the ratio 1 : 2: 3...) when n >>1.
12.23 What is the minimum energy that must be given to a H atom in

ground state so that it can emit an H γ line in Balmer series. If the
d
angular momentum of the system is conserved, what would be
the angular momentum of such H γ photon?
he
LA
pu T
is
12.24 The first four spectral lines in the Lyman serics of a H-atom are
λ = 1218 Å, 1028Å, 974.3 Å and 951.4Å. If instead of Hydrogen,
re ER
we consider Deuterium, calculate the shift in the wavelength of
12.25
these lines.
bl
Deutrium was discovered in 1932 by Harold Urey by measuring
be C
the small change in wavelength for a particular transition in 1H

and 2H. This is because, the wavelength of transition depend to a
certain extent on the nuclear mass. If nuclear motion is taken
o N
into account then the electrons and nucleus revolve around their
common centre of mass. Such a system is equivalent to a single
particle with a reduced mass μ, revolving around the nucleus at
tt ©
a distance equal to the electron-nucleus separation. Here

μ = meM/(me +M) where M is the nuclear mass and me is the
electronic mass. Estimate the percentage difference in wavelength
for the 1st line of the Lyman series in 1H and 2H. (Mass of 1H
nucleus is 1.6725 × 10 –27 kg, Mass of 2 H nucleus is
3.3374 × 10–27 kg, Mass of electron = 9.109 × 10–31 kg.)
12.26 If a proton had a radius R and the charge was uniformly

distributed, calculate using Bohr theory, the ground state energy
of a H-atom when (i) R = 0.1Å, and (ii) R = 10 Å.
no
12.27 In the Auger process an atom makes a transition to a lower state

without emitting a photon. The excess energy is transferred to
an outer electron which may be ejected by the atom. (This is
called an Auger electron). Assuming the nucleus to be massive,
calculate the kinetic energy of an n = 4 Auger electron emitted
by Chromium by absorbing the energy from a n = 2 to n = 1
transition.
79
e2
12.28 The inverse square law in electrostatics is | F |= for the
( 4πε 0 ) .r 2
⎛1⎞
force between an electron and a proton. The ⎜ ⎟ dependence of
⎝r ⎠
| F | can be understood in quantum theory as being due to the
fact that the ‘particle’ of light (photon) is massless. If photons had
a mass m p, force would be modified to
d
e2 ⎡ 1 λ⎤ h
| F |= ⎢ + ⎥ .e ×p ( – λr ) where λ = m p c / h and h = .
( 4πε 0 ) r ⎣ r r ⎦
2 2
2π
he
Estimate the change in the ground state energy of a H-atom if mp
were 10–6 times the mass of an electron.
pu T
is
12.29 The Bohr model for the H-atom relies on the Coulomb’s law of
re ER
electrostatics. Coulomb’s law has not directly been verified for
bl
very short distances of the order of angstroms. Supposing
Coulomb’s law between two opposite charge + q1, –q2 is modified
to
be C
q1q 2 1
| F |= , r ≥ R0
( 4πε 0 ) r 2
o N
ε
q1q2 1 ⎛ R 0 ⎞
= ⎜ ⎟ , r ≤ R0
4πε 0 R 02 ⎝ r ⎠
tt ©
Calculate in such a case, the ground state energy of a H-atom, if

ε = 0.1, R0 = 1Å.
no
80
Chapter Thirteen
NUCLEI
d
he
pu T
is
re ER
bl
be C
o N
MCQ I
tt ©
13.1 Suppose we consider a large number of containers each

containing initially 10000 atoms of a radioactive material with a
half life of 1 year. After 1 year,
(a) all the containers will have 5000 atoms of the material.
(b) all the containers will contain the same number of atoms of
the material but that number will only be approximately 5000.
(c) the containers will in general have different numbers of the
atoms of the material but their average will be close to 5000.
no
(d) none of the containers can have more than 5000 atoms.
13.2 The gravitational force between a H-atom and another particle of
mass m will be given by Newton’s law:
M .m
F =G , where r is in km and
r2
(a) M = mproton + m electron.
(b) M = mproton + melectron − B (B = 13.6 eV).

c2
(c) M is not related to the mass of the hydrogen atom.

|V |
(d) M = mproton + m electron − (|V | = magnitude of the potential
c2
energy of electron in the H-atom).
13.3 When a nucleus in an atom undergoes a radioactive decay, the
electronic energy levels of the atom
(a) do not change for any type of radioactivity .
(b) change for α and β radioactivity but not for γ-radioactivity.
d
(c) change for α-radioactivity but not for others.
(d) change for β-radioactivity but not for others.
he
13.4 Mx and My denote the atomic masses of the parent and the daughter
nuclei respectively in a radioactive decay. The Q-value for a β –
pu T decay is Q1 and that for a β + decay is Q2. If me denotes the mass of
is
an electron, then which of the following statements is correct?
re ER
(a) Q1 = (Mx – My) c2 and Q2 = (Mx – My – 2me)c2
bl (b)
(c)
(d)
Q1 = (Mx – My) c2 and Q2 = (Mx – My )c2
Q1 = (Mx – My – 2me) c2 and Q2 = (Mx – My +2 me)c2
Q1 = (Mx – My + 2me) c2 and Q2 = (Mx – My +2 me)c2
be C
13.5 Tritium is an isotope of hydrogen whose nucleus Triton contains

2 neutrons and 1 proton. Free neutrons decay into p + e + ν . If
o N
3
one of the neutrons in Triton decays, it would transform into He
nucleus. This does not happen. This is because
3
(a) Triton energy is less than that of a He nucleus.
tt ©
(b) the electron created in the beta decay process cannot remain
in the nucleus.
(c) both the neutrons in triton have to decay simultaneously
resulting in a nucleus with 3 protons, which is not a He3
nucleus.
(d) because free neutrons decay due to external perturbations
which is absent in a triton nucleus.
13.6. Heavy stable nucle have more neutrons than protons. This is
because of the fact that
(a) neutrons are heavier than protons.
no
(b) electrostatic force between protons are repulsive.

(c) neutrons decay into protons through beta decay.
(d) nuclear forces between neutrons are weaker than that between
protons.
13.7 In a nuclear reactor, moderators slow down the neutrons which
come out in a fission process. The moderator used have light
nuclei. Heavy nuclei will not serve the purpose because
82
Nuclei
(a) they will break up.

(b) elastic collision of neutrons with heavy nuclei will not slow
them down.
(c) the net weight of the reactor would be unbearably high.
(d) substances with heavy nuclei do not occur in liquid or gaseous
state at room temperature.
MCQ II
d
13.8 Fusion processes, like combining two deuterons to form a He
nucleus are impossible at ordinary temperatures and pressure.
he
The reasons for this can be traced to the fact:
(a) nuclear forces have short range.
pu T
(b) nuclei are positively charged.
is
(c) the original nuclei must be completely ionized before fusion
re ER
can take place.
bl
(d) the original nuclei must first break up before combining with
each other.
13.9 Samples of two radioactive nuclides A and B are taken. λA and λB
be C
are the disintegration constants of A and B respectively. In which

of the following cases, the two samples can simultaneously have
the same decay rate at any time?
o N
(a) Initial rate of decay of A is twice the initial rate of decay of B

and λA = λB.
(b) Initial rate of decay of A is twice the initial rate of decay of B
tt ©
and λA > λB.

(c) Initial rate of decay of B is twice the initial rate of decay of A
and λA > λB.
(d) Initial rate of decay of B is same as the rate of decay of A at
t = 2h and λB < λA.
13.10 The variation of decay rate of two radioactive samples A and B
with time is shown in Fig. 13.1.
Which of the following statements are true?
(a) Decay constant of A is greater than that of B, hence A
no
dN
always decays faster than B.
dt
(b) Decay constant of B is greater than that of A but its
decay rate is always smaller than that of A.
(c) Decay constant of A is greater than that of B but it does B
not always decay faster than B. A
(d) Decay constant of B is smaller than that of A but still its t
decay rate becomes equal to that of A at a later instant.
Fig. 13.1
83
VSA
13.11 He 23 and He13 nuclei have the same mass number. Do they have
the same binding energy?
dN
13.12 Draw a graph showing the variation of decay rate with number
dt A
of active nuclei.
13.13 Which sample, A or B shown in Fig. 13.2 has shorter mean-life?
d
B
he
13.14 Which one of the following cannot emit radiation and why?
t
Fig. 13.2 Excited nucleus, excited electron.
pu T
is
13.15 In pair annihilation, an electron and a positron destroy each other
to produce gamma radiation. How is the momentum conserved?
re ER
bl SA
13.16 Why do stable nuclei never have more protons than neutrons?
be C
13.17 Consider a radioactive nucleus A which decays to a stable nucleus

C through the following sequence:
o N
A→B→C
Here B is an intermediate nuclei which is also radioactive.
Considering that there are N0 atoms of A initially, plot the graph
tt ©
showing the variation of number of atoms of A and B versus time.
13.18 A piece of wood from the ruins of an ancient building was found
to have a 14C activity of 12 disintegrations per minute per gram
of its carbon content. The 14C activity of the living wood is 16
disintegrations per minute per gram. How long ago did the tree,
from which the wooden sample came, die? Given half-life of 14C is
5760 years.
13.19 Are the nucleons fundamental particles, or do they consist of

no
still smaller parts? One way to find out is to probe a nucleon just
as Rutherford probed an atom. What should be the kinetic energy
of an electron for it to be able to probe a nucleon? Assume the
diameter of a nucleon to be approximately 10–15 m.
13.20 A nuclide 1 is said to be the mirror isobar of nuclide 2 if Z1 =N2

23
and Z2 =N1 . (a) What nuclide is a mirror isobar of 11 Na ? (b) Which
nuclide out of the two mirror isobars have greater binding energy
and why?
84
Nuclei
LA
13.21 Sometimes a radioactive nucleus decays into a nucleus which
itself is radioactive. An example is :
38
Sulphur ⎯⎯⎯⎯
half-life
=2.48 h
→ 38
Cl ⎯⎯⎯⎯
half-life
= 0.62h
→ 38
Ar (stable) .
38
Assume that we start with 1000 S nuclei at time t = 0. The
number of 38Cl is of count zero at t = 0 and will again be zero at
t = ∞ . At what value of t, would the number of counts be a
d
maximum?
he
13.22 Deuteron is a bound state of a neutron and a proton with a
binding energy B = 2.2 MeV. A γ -ray of energy E is aimed at a
deuteron nucleus to try to break it into a (neutron + proton)
pu T
such that the n and p move in the direction of the incident γ-ray.
is
If E = B, show that this cannot happen. Hence calculate how
re ER
much bigger than B must E be for such a process to happen.
13.23
bl
The deuteron is bound by nuclear forces just as H-atom is made
up of p and e bound by electrostatic forces. If we consider the
force between neutron and proton in deuteron as given in the
be C
form of a Coulomb potential but with an effective charge e ′ :
1 e ′2
o N
F =
4πε 0 r
estimate the value of (e’/e) given that the binding energy of a

tt ©
deuteron is 2.2 MeV.

13.24 Before the neutrino hypothesis, the beta decay process was
throught to be the transition,
n → p +e
If this was true, show that if the neutron was at rest, the proton
and electron would emerge with fixed energies and calculate
them.Experimentally, the electron energy was found to have a
large range.
no
13.25 The activity R of an unknown radioactive nuclide is measured

at hourly intervals. The results found are tabulated as follows:
t (h) 0 1 2 3 4
R (MBq) 100 35.36 12.51 4.42 1.56
85
(i) Plot the graph of R versus t and calculate half-life from the
graph.
⎛ R ⎞
(ii) Plot the graph of ln ⎜ ⎟ versus t and obtain the value of
⎝ R0 ⎠
half-life from the graph.
13.26 Nuclei with magic no. of proton Z = 2, 8, 20, 28, 50, 52 and
magic no. of neutrons N = 2, 8, 20, 28, 50, 82 and 126 are found
to be very stable. (i) Verify this by calculating the proton
d
separation energy Sp for 120Sn (Z = 50) and 121Sb = (Z = 51).
he
The proton separation energy for a nuclide is the minimum
energy required to separate the least tightly bound proton from
a nucleus of that nuclide. It is given by
pu T
is
Sp = (MZ–1, N + MH – MZ,N ) c 2.
re ER
Given 119 In = 118.9058u, 120 Sn = 119.902199u,
bl
121
Sb = 120.903824u, 1H = 1.0078252u.
(ii) What does the existance of magic number indicate?
be C
o N
tt ©
no
86
Chapter Fourteen
SEMICONDUCTOR
ELECTRONICS
d
he
MATERIALS, DEVICES pu T
is
AND SIMPLE CIRCUITS
re ER
bl
be C
o N
MCQ I
tt ©
14.1 The conductivity of a semiconductor increases with increase in

temperature because
(a) number density of free current carriers increases.
(b) relaxation time increases.
(c) both number density of carriers and relaxation time increase.
(d) number density of current carriers increases, relaxation time
decreases but effect of decrease in relaxation time is much less
than increase in number density. 1
no
2
14.2 In Fig. 14.1, Vo is the potential barrier across a p-n 3
junction, when no battery is connected across the junction
V0
(a) 1 and 3 both correspond to forward bias of junction
(b) 3 corresponds to forward bias of junction and 1
corresponds to reverse bias of junction
(c) 1 corresponds to forward bias and 3 corresponds to reverse
bias of junction. Fig. 14.1
(d) 3 and 1 both correspond to reverse bias of junction.

14.3 In Fig. 14.2, assuming the diodes to be ideal,
(a) D1 is forward biased and D2 is reverse biased and hence current
flows from A to B
(b) D2 is forward biased and D1 is reverse biased and hence no
current flows from B to A and vice versa.
(c) D1and D2 are both R D1
A
forward biased –10V
d
and hence
current flows
he
from A to B. D2
(d) D 1 and D 2 are
both reverse Fig. 14.2 B
pu T biased and hence
is
no current flows
re ER
from A to B and vice versa.
bl 14.4 A 220 V A.C. supply is connected between points A and B

(Fig. 14.3). What will be the potential difference V across the
capacitor?
be C
(a) 220V.
A (b) 110V.
o N
(c) 0V.
220V C V
A.c. (d) 220 2 V.
B
tt ©
Fig. 14.3 14.5 Hole is

(a) an anti-particle of electron.
(b) a vacancy created when an electron leaves a covalent bond.
(c) absence of free electrons.
(d) an artifically created particle.
14.6 The output of the given circuit in Fig. 14.4.
(a) would be zero at all times.
(b) would be like a half wave rectifier with positive

no
cycles in output.
(c) would be like a half wave rectifier with negative
vm sin wt ~ cycles in output.
(d) would be like that of a full wave rectifier.
Fig. 14.4
88
Semiconductor Electronics: Materials
Devices and Simple Circuits
14.7 In the circuit shown in Fig. 14.5, if the diode forward voltage drop A
0.2 mA
is 0.3 V, the voltage difference between A and B is
(a) 1.3 V
(b) 2.3 V 5K
(c) 0
(d) 0.5 V
14.8 Truth table for the given circuit (Fig. 14.6) is
5K
d
(a) A B E
0 0 1
B
he
0 1 0
1 0 1 Fig. 14.5
1 1 0
A C
pu T
is
(b) A B E
0 0 1
re ER
E
0 1 0
1
1
(c) A
0
1
B
bl0
1
E
B D
be C
Fig. 14.6
0 0 0
0 1 1
o N
1 0 0
1 1 1
(d) A B E
tt ©
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
MCQ II
14.9 When an electric field is applied across a semiconductor
(a) electrons move from lower energy level to higher energy level
in the conduction band.
no
(b) electrons move from higher energy level to lower energy level
in the conduction band.
(c) holes in the valence band move from higher energy level to
lower energy level.
(d) holes in the valence band move from lower energy level to
higher energy level.
89
14.10 Consider an npn transitor with its base-emitter junction forward

biased and collector base junction reverse biased. Which of the
following statements are true?.
(a) Electrons crossover from emitter to collector.
(b) Holes move from base to collector.
(c) Electrons move from emitter to base.
(d) Electrons from emitter move out of base without going to the
collector.
Vo
d
14.11 Figure 14.7 shows the transfer characteristics of a base biased
CE transistor. Which of the following statements are true?
he
(a) At Vi = 0.4V, transistor is in active state.
(b) At Vi = 1V , it can be used as an amplifier.
0 0.6V 2V
pu T
Vi (c) At Vi = 0..5V, it can be used as a switch turned off.
is
Fig. 14.7 (d) At Vi = 2.5V, it can be used as a switch turned on.
re ER
14.12 In a npn transistor circuit, the collector current is 10mA. If
bl 95 per cent of the electrons emitted reach the collector, which of

the following statements are true?
(a) The emitter current will be 8 mA.
be C
(b) The emitter current will be 10.53 mA.

(c) The base current will be 0.53 mA.
o N
(d) The base current will be 2 mA.

14.13 In the depletion region of a diode
tt ©
(a) there are no mobile charges

(b) equal number of holes and electrons exist, making the
region neutral.
(c) recombination of holes and electrons has taken place.
(d) immobile charged ions exist.
14.14 What happens during regulation action of a Zener diode?
(a) The current in and voltage across the Zenor remains fixed.
(b) The current through the series Resistance (Rs) changes.
(c) The Zener resistance is constant.
no
(d) The resistance offered by the Zener changes.

14.15 To reduce the ripples in a rectifier circuit with capacitor filter
(a) RL should be increased.
(b) input frequency should be decreased.
(c) input frequency should be increased.
(d) capacitors with high capacitance should be used.
90
14.16 The breakdown in a reverse biased p–n junction diode is more

likely to occur due to
(a) large velocity of the minority charge carriers if the doping
concentration is small.
(b) large velocity of the minority charge carriers if the doping
concentration is large.
(c) strong electric field in a depletion region if the doping
concentration is small.
d
(d) strong electric field in the depletion region if the doping
concentration is large.
he
VSA
14.17
pu T
Why are elemental dopants for Silicon or Germanium usually
is
chosen from group XIII or group XV?
re ER
14.18 Sn, C, and Si, Ge are all group XIV elements. Yet, Sn is a
14.19
Why?
bl
conductor, C is an insulator while Si and Ge are semiconductors.
Can the potential barrier across a p-n junction be measured by

be C
simply connecting a voltmeter across the junction?

o N
14.20 Draw the output waveform across the resistor (Fig.14.8).

V0
A
tt ©
+1V
p
0
–1V
Input waveform at A
Fig. 14.8
14.21 The amplifiers X, Y and Z are connected in series. If the voltage
gains of X, Y and Z are 10, 20 and 30, respectively and the
input signal is 1 mV peak value, then what is the output signal
voltage (peak value)
no
(i) if dc supply voltage is 10V?

(ii) if dc supply voltage is 5V?
14.22 In a CE transistor amplifier there is a current and voltage gain

associated with the circuit. In other words there is a power gain.
Considering power a measure of energy, does the circuit voilate
conservation of energy?
91
S.A
I I
14.23 (mA)
P P
V V
(volt)
d
(a) (b)
he
Fig. 14.9
(i) Name the type of a diode whose characteristics are shown in
pu T Fig. 14.9 (A) and Fig. 14.9(B).
is
(ii) What does the point P in Fig. (A) represent?
re ER
(iii) What does the points P and Q in Fig. (B) represent?
bl 14.24 Three photo diodes D1, D2 and D3 are made of semiconductors

having band gaps of 2.5eV, 2eV and 3eV, respectively. Which
ones will be able to detect light of wavelength 6000 A ?
0
be C
14.25 If the resistance R1 is increased (Fig.14.10), how will the readings

o N
of the ammeter and voltmeter change?

A
R2 v
tt ©
R1
Fig. 14.10
14.26 Two car garages have a common gate which needs to open
automatically when a car enters either of the garages or cars
no
enter both. Devise a circuit that resembles this situation using

diodes for this situation.
14.27 How would you set up a circuit to obtain NOT gate using a
transistor?
14.28 Explain why elemental semiconductor cannot be used to make

visible LEDs.
92
14.29 Write the truth table for the circuit shown in Fig.14.11.
+ 5V
Name the gate that the circuit resembles.
14.30 A Zener of power rating 1 W is to be used as a voltage D1

regulator. If zener has a breakdown of 5V and it has to A V0
regulate voltage which fluctuated between 3V and 7V, what
should be the value of Rs for safe operation (Fig.14.12)? B
D2
Rs
Fig. 14.11
d
he
Unregulated Regulated
voltage voltage
pu T
is
Fig. 14.12 A I4 125W
B
re ER
LA I3 125W
bl
C D
I2 125W
14.31 If each diode in Fig. 14.13 has a forward bias resistance of E F
25Ω and infinite resistance in reverse bias, what will be the I1
25W
be C
values of the current I1, I2, I3 and I4? G H

5V
14.32 In the circuit shown in Fig.14.14, when the input voltage of the Fig. 14.13
o N
base resistance is 10V, Vbe is zero and Vce is also zero. Find the
values of Ib, Ic and β.
10V
tt ©
RC
3kW
Rp
Vi
400
kW
Fig. 14.14
14.33 Draw the output signals C1 and C2 in the given combination of
gates (Fig. 14.15).
no
A A
0 2 3 4 5 t (s) C1
1
B
B
0
1 2 3 4 5 t (s) A
C2
B
Fig. 14.15
93
14.34 Consider the circuit arrangement shown in Fig 14.16 (a) for study-
ing input and output characteristics of npn transistor in CE con-
figuration.
ICC
RC IC
VCE (mA)
C
B Q
4mA IB = 30mA
VCC
d
RB E
VBE
VBB
he
8V VCE (Volts)
pu T
is
Fig. 14.16 (a) Fig. 14.16 (b)
re ER
bl
Select the values of RB and RC for a transistor whose VBE = 0.7 V,
so that the transistor is operating at point Q as shown in the
characteristics shown in Fig. 14.16 (b).
Given that the input impedance of the transistor is very small
be C
and VCC = VBB = 16 V, also find the voltage gain and power gain
of circuit making appropriate assumptions.
o N
14.35 Assuming the ideal diode, draw the output waveform for the
circuit given in Fig. 14.17. Explain the waveform.
tt ©
20 sin wt ~
5V
Fig. 14.17
no
14.36 Suppose a ‘n’-type wafer is created by doping Si crystal having

5 × 1028 atoms/m3 with 1ppm concentration of As. On the
surface 200 ppm Boron is added to create ‘P’ region in this wafer.
Considering ni = 1.5 × 1016 m–3, (i) Calculate the densities of the
charge carriers in the n & p regions. (ii) Comment which charge
carriers would contribute largely for the reverse saturation
current when diode is reverse biased.
94
14.37 An X-OR gate has following truth table:
A B Y
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
d
It is represented by following logic relation
he
Y =A.B+ A.B
Build this gate using AND, OR and NOT gates.
pu T
is
14.38 Consider a box with three terminals on top of it as shown in
Fig.14.18 (a):
re ER
bl A
be C
B
C
o N
Fig. 14.18 (a)

tt ©
Three components namely, two germanium diodes and one

resistor are connected across these three terminals in some
arrangement.
A student performs an experiment in which any two of these three
terminals are connected in the circuit shown in Fig. 14.18 (b).
mA
+
V
– Box
Terminals
VDC
no
Fig. 14.18 (b)
The student obtains graphs of current-voltage characteristics for

unknown combination of components between the two terminals
connected in the circuit.
95
The graphs are
(i) when A is positive and B is negative

I
d
Fig. 14.18 (c)
he
(ii) when A is negative and B is positive
pu T I
is
1
= 1000Ω
re ER
V slope
bl
0.7V
be C
Fig. 14.18 (d)

o N
(iii) When B is negative and C is positive
I
tt ©
V
0.7V
Fig. 14.18 (e)
(iv) When B is positive and C is negative
I
no
Fig. 14.18 (f)
96
(v) When A is positive and C is negative

I
Fig. 14.18 (g)
d
(vi) When A is negative and C is positive
he
I
pu T
1.4V
is
re ER
bl Fig. 14.18 (h)
From these graphs of current – voltage charac-
teristic shown in Fig. 14.18 (c) to (h), determine RB RC = 7.8K
VCC = 12V
A
be C
the arrangement of components between A, B VC

and C.
o N
14.39 For the transistor circuit shown in Fig.14.19,

evaluate VE, RB, RE given IC = 1 mA, VCE = 3V, VBE
= 0.5 V and VCC = 12 V, 20K RE
β = 100.
tt ©
14.40 In the circuit shown in Fig.14.20, find the value

of RC.
12V Fig. 14.19
100K RC A
C
β = 100
E
VBE = 0.5 V
no
20K VCE = 3 V
Fig. 14.20
97
Chapter Fifteen
COMMUNICATION
SYSTEMS
d
he
pu T
is
re ER
bl
be C
o N
MCQ I
tt ©
15.1 Three waves A, B and C of frequencies 1600 kHz, 5 MHz and

60 MHz, respectively are to be transmitted from one place to
another. Which of the following is the most appropriate mode of
communication:
(a) A is transmitted via space wave while B and C are transmitted
via sky wave.
(b) A is transmitted via ground wave, B via sky wave and C via
space wave.
(c) B and C are transmitted via ground wave while A is transmitted
no
via sky wave.

(d) B is transmitted via ground wave while A and C are transmitted
via space wave.
15.2 A 100m long antenna is mounted on a 500m tall building. The
complex can become a transmission tower for waves with λ
(a) ~ 400 m.
(b) ~ 25 m.
98
Communication Systems
(c) ~ 150 m.
(d) ~ 2400 m.
15.3 A 1 KW signal is transmitted using a communication channel
which provides attenuation at the rate of – 2dB per km. If the
communication channel has a total length of 5 km, the power of
⎛ P0 ⎞
the signal received is [gain in dB = 10 log ⎜ P ⎟ ]
⎝ i ⎠
(a) 900 W.
d
(b) 100 W.
he
(c) 990 W.
(d) 1010 W.
15.4 A speech signal of 3 kHz is used to modulate a carrier signal of
pu T
frequency 1 MHz, using amplitude modulation. The frequencies
is
of the side bands will be
re ER
(a) 1.003 MHz and 0.997 MHz.
(b)
(c)
(d) bl
3001 kHz and 2997 kHz.
1003 kHz and 1000 kHz.
1 MHz and 0.997 MHz.
be C
15.5 A message signal of frequency ωm is superposed on a carrier wave

of frequency ωc to get an amplitude modulated wave (AM).
o N
The frequency of the AM wave will be

(a) ωm.
(b) ωC.
tt ©
ωc + ωm
(c) .
2
ωc – ωm
(d) .
2
15.6 I-V characteristics of four devices are shown in Fig. 15.1

no
I I I
I
V V V V
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
Fig. 15.1
99
Identify devices that can be used for modulation:

(a) ‘i’ and ‘iii’.
(b) only ‘iii’.
(c) ‘ii’ and some regions of ‘iv’.
(d) All the devices can be used.
15.7 A male voice after modulation-transmission sounds like that of
a female to the receiver. The problem is due to
d
(a) poor selection of modulation index (selected 0 < m < 1)
(b) poor bandwidth selection of amplifiers.
he
(c) poor selection of carrier frequency
(d) loss of energy in transmission.
pu T 15.8 A basic communication system consists of
is
(A) transmitter.
re ER
(B) information source.
bl (C)
(D)
(E)
user of information.
channel.
receiver.
be C
Choose the correct sequence in which these are arranged in a

basic communication system:
o N
(a) ABCDE.
(b) BADEC.
(c) BDACE.
tt ©
(d) BEADC.
15.9 Identify the mathematical expression for amplitude modulated
wave:
(a) Ac sin [{ωc + k1vm(t)}t + φ ].
(b) Ac sin {ωct + φ + k2 vm(t)}.
(c) {Ac + k2 vm(t)} sin (ωct + φ ).
(d) Ac vm(t) sin (ωct + φ ).
MCQ II
no
15.10 An audio signal of 15kHz frequency cannot be transmitted over

long distances without modulation because
(a) the size of the required antenna would be at least 5 km
which is not convenient.
100
(b) the audio signal can not be transmitted through sky waves.
(c) the size of the required antenna would be at least 20 km,
which is not convenient.
(d) effective power transmitted would be very low, if the size of
the antenna is less than 5 km.
15.11 Audio sine waves of 3 kHz frequency are used to amplitude

modulate a carrier signal of 1.5 MHz. Which of the following
statements are true?
d
(a) The side band frequencies are 1506 kHz and 1494 kHz.
he
(b) The bandwidth required for amplitude modulation is 6kHz.
(c) The bandwidth required for amplitude modulation is 3 MHz.
(d) The side band frequencies are 1503 kHz and 1497 kHz.
pu T
is
15.12 A TV trasmission tower has a height of 240 m. Signals broadcast
from this tower will be received by LOS communication at a
re ER
distance of (assume the radius of earth to be 6.4 × 106 m)
(a)
(b)
(c)
100 km.
24 km.
55 km. bl
be C
(d) 50 km.
15.13 The frequency response curve (Fig. 15.2) for the filter circuit
o N
used for production of AM wave should be
Gain Gain
tt ©
ωc + ωm ω
ωc – ωm
(i) (ii)
Gain Gain
no
ω
ωc – ωm ωc + ωm ω ωc – ωm ωc + ωm
(iii) (iv)
Fig. 15.2
101
(a) (i) followed by (ii).

(b) (ii) followed by (i).
(c) (iii).
(d) (iv).
15.14 In amplitude modulation, the modulation index m, is kept less

than or equal to 1 because
(a) m > 1, will result in interference between carrier frequency
d
and message frequency, resulting into distortion.
(b) m > 1 will result in overlapping of both side bands resulting
he
into loss of information.
(c) m > 1 will result in change in phase between carrier signal
and message signal.
pu T
(d) m > 1 indicates amplitude of message signal greater than
is
amplitude of carrier signal resulting into distortion.
re ER
VSA
bl 15.15 Which of the following would produce analog signals and which
would produce digital signals?
be C
(i) A vibrating tuning fork.

(ii) Musical sound due to a vibrating sitar string.
o N
(iii) Light pulse.

(iv) Output of NAND gate.
15.16 Would sky waves be suitable for transmission of TV signals of
tt ©
60 MHz frequency?
15.17 Two waves A and B of frequencies 2 MHz and 3 MHz, respectively

are beamed in the same direction for communication via sky wave.
Which one of these is likely to travel longer distance in the
ionosphere before suffering total internal reflection?
15.18 The maximum amplitude of an A.M. wave is found to be 15 V

while its minimum amplitude is found to be 3 V. What is the
modulation index?
no
15.19 Compute the LC product of a tuned amplifier circuit required to

generate a carrier wave of 1 MHz for amplitude modulation.
15.20 Why is a AM signal likely to be more noisy than a FM signal

upon transmission through a channel?
102
SA
15.21 Figure 15.3 shows a communication system. What is the output
power when input signal is of 1.01mW ? (gain in dB = 10 log10
(Po/Pi ).
10dB 20dB
d
Loss 2dB km –1
Input Output
he
5.0 km
pu T
Amplifier Amplifier
is
re ER
Fig. 15.3
bl
15.22 A TV transmission tower antenna is at a height of 20 m. How
much service area can it cover if the receiving antenna is (i) at
be C
ground level, (ii) at a height of 25 m? Calculate the percentage

increase in area covered in case (ii) relative to case (i).
o N
15.23 If the whole earth is to be connected by LOS communication

using space waves (no restriction of antenna size or tower height),
what is the minimum number of antennas required? Calculate
tt ©
the tower height of these antennas in terms of earths radius?
15.24 The maximum frequency for reflection of sky waves from a certain
layer of the ionosphere is found to be fmax = 9(Nmax)1/2, where Nmax
is the maximum electron density at that layer of the ionosphere.
On a certain day it is observed that signals of frequencies higher
than 5MHz are not received by reflection from the F1 layer of the
ionosphere while signals of frequencies higher than 8MHz are
not received by reflection from the F2 layer of the inonosphere.
Estimate the maximum electron densities of the F1 and F2 layers
on that day.
no
15.25 On radiating (sending out) an AM modulated signal, the total

radiated power is due to energy carried by ωc, ωc – ωm & ωc + ωm.
Suggest ways to minimise cost of radiation without
compromising on information.
103
LA
15.26 (i) The intensity of a light pulse travelling along a communication
channel decreases exponentially with distance x according
to the relation I = Ioe–αx, where Io is the intensity at x = 0 and α
is the attenuation constant.
Show that the intensity reduces by 75 per cent after a distance
⎛ ln 4 ⎞
of ⎜ ⎟
d
⎝ α ⎠
(ii) Attenuation of a signal can be expressed in decibel (dB)
he
⎛ I ⎞
according to the relation dB =10 log10 ⎜ ⎟ . What is the
⎝ Io ⎠
pu T attenuation in dB/km for an optical fibre in which the
is
intensity falls by 50 per cent over a distance of 50 km?
re ER
15.27 A 50 MHz sky wave takes 4.04 ms to reach a receiver via
bl
re-transmission from a satellite 600 km above earth’s surface.
Assuming re-transmission time by satellite negligible, find
the distance between source and receiver. If communication
between the two was to be done by Line of Sight (LOS) method,
be C
what should size and placement of receiving and transmitting

antenna be?
o N
15.28 An amplitude modulated wave is as shown in Fig. 15.4. Calculate

(i) the percentage modulation, (ii) peak carrier voltage and,
(iii) peak value of information voltage.
tt ©
100V
20V t
no
Fig. 15.4
104
15.29 (i) Draw the plot of amplitude versus ‘ω’ for an amplitude
modulated wave whose carrier wave (ωc) is carrying two
modulating signals, ω1 and ω2 (ω2 > ω1). [Hint: Follow
derivation from Eq 15.6 of NCERT Textbook of XII]
(ii) Is the plot symmetrical about ωc? Comment especially about
plot in region ω < ωc.
(iii) Extrapolate and predict the problems one can expect if more
waves are to be modulated.
(iv) Suggest solutions to the above problem. In the process can
d
one understand another advantage of modulation in terms
of bandwidth?
he
15.30 An audio signal is modulated by a carrier wave of 20MHz such
that the bandwidth required for modulation is 3kHz. Could this
wave be demodulated by a diode detector which has the values
pu T
is
of R and C as
(i) R = 1 kΩ, C = 0.01μF.
re ER
(ii) R = 10 kΩ, C = 0.01μF.
bl
(iii) R = 10 kΩ, C = 0.1μF.
be C
o N
tt ©
no
105
ANSWERS
d
he
Chapter 1
1.1 (a)
pu T
is
1.2 (a)
re ER
bl
1.3 (d)
1.4 (b)
1.5 (c)
be C
1.6 (a)
o N
1.7 (a)
1.8 (c), (d)
1.9 (b), (d)

tt ©
1.10 (b), (d)
1.11 (c), (d)
1.12 (a), (c).
1.13 (a), (b), (c) and (d).
1.14 Zero.
–Q Q
1.15 (i) (ii)
4π R12 4π R 22
no
1.16 The electric fields bind the atoms to neutral entity. Fields are caused
by excess charges. There can be no excess charge on the inter surface
of an isolated conductor.
1.17 No, the field may be normal. However, the converse is true.
106
Answers
1.18
d
Top view Side view
he
q q q q
1.19 (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) .
8ε 0 4ε 0 2ε 0 2ε 0
1.20
pu T
1 Molar mass M of Al has NA = 6.023 × 1023 atoms.
is
re ER
m
∴ m = mass of Al paisa coin has N = N A atoms
bl
M
Now, ZAl = 13, MAl = 26.9815g
0.75
Hence N = 6.02 × 1023 atoms/mol ×
be C
26.9815g/mol
= 1.6733 × 1022 atoms

o N
∴q = +ve charge in paisa = N Ze

22 –19
= (1.67 × 10 )(13) (1.60 × 10 C)
= 3.48 × 10 C.4
tt ©
q = 34.8 kC of ±ve charge.

This is an enormous amount of charge. Thus we see that ordinary neutral
matter contains enormous amount of ± charges.
2 4
q  Nm 2  (3.48 × 10 C)
1.21 (i) F1 = =  8.99 × 109
2  –4 2
= 1.1 × 1023 N
4π ε r 
0 1 C 2
 10 m
F2 r12 (10 –2 m)2

(ii) = = = 10 –8 ⇒ F2 = F1 × 10 –8 = 1.1 × 1015 N
F1 r22 (102 m)2
no
F3 r12 (10 –2 m)2

(iii) = = = 10 –16
F1 r32 (106 m)2
F3 = 10–16 F1 = 1.1 × 107 N.
Conclusion: When separated as point charges these charges exert an

enormous force. It is not easy to disturb electrical neutrality.
107
1.22 (i) Zero, from symmetry.

(ii) Removing a +ve Cs ion is equivalent to adding singly charged -ve
Cs ion at that location.
Net force then is
e2
F =
4πε 0 r 2
where r = distance between the Cl ion and a Cs ion.
= (0.20)2 +(0.20)2 +(0.20)2 ×10 –9 = 3(0.20)2 ×10 –9
d
= 0.346 × 10–9 m
he
(8.99×109 )(1.6 × 10 –19 )2
Hence, F = = 192 × 10 –11
(0.346×10 –9 )2
pu T
is
= 1.92 × 10–9 N
–
re ER
Ans 1.92 × 10–9 N, directed from A to Cl
bl
1.23 At P: on 2q, Force due to q is to the left and that due to –3q is to the
right.
2q 2 6q 2
∴ =
be C
2
4πε 0 x 4πε 0 (d + x )2
∴ (d + x)2 = 3x2 P q d
o N
∴ 2x2 – 2dx – d2 = 0 2q x –3q
d 3d
x = ±
tt ©
2 2
(–ve sign would be between q and –3q and hence is unaceptable.)
d 3d d
x = + = (1 + 3) to the left of q.
2 2 2
1.24 (a) Charges A and C are positive since lines of force emanate from them.
(b) Charge C has the largest magnitude since maximum number of
field lines are associated with it.
(c) (i) near A. There is no neutral point between a positive and a negative
charge. A neutral point may exist between two like charges. From
the figure we see that a neutral point exists between charges A and
no
C. Also between two like charges the neutral point is closer to the
charge with smaller magnitude. Thus, electric field is zero near
charge A.
1 q uuuur 1 2q uuuur
1.25 (a) (i) zero (ii) 2
along OA (iii) 2
along OA
4πε 0 r 4πε 0 r
(b) same as (a).
108
Answers
1.26 (a) Let the Universe have a radius R. Assume that the hydrogen atoms
are uniformly distributed. The charge on each hydrogen atom is
eH = – (1 + y) e + e = – ye = |ye|
The mass of each hydrogen atom is ~ mp (mass of proton). Expansion
starts if the Coulumb repulsion on a hydrogen atom, at R, is larger
than the gravitational attraction.
Let the Electric Field at R be E. Then
4
4πR2 E = π R 33 N ye (Gauss’s law)
3ε o
d
1 N ye
E (R) = R rˆ
3 εo
he
Let the gravitational field at R be GR. Then
4
– 4πR2 GR = 4 πG m p π R 3N
pu T 3
is
4
GR = – π Gm ρ NR
re ER
3
bl GR (R ) = –
4
3
πGm ρ N R rˆ
Thus the Coulombic force on a hydrogen atom at R is

be C
1 Ny 2e2
yeE (R) = R rˆ
3 εo
o N
The gravitional force on this atom is

4π
m pGR ( R ) = – GNm 2pR rˆ
3
tt ©
The net force on the atom is

 1 Ny 2e 2 4π 
F = R– GNm 2pR  rˆ
 3 ε o 3 
The critical value is when
2 2
1 Ny C e 4π
R= GNm p2R
3 εo 3
m 2p
⇒ y 2c = 4πε oG
e2
7 × 10 –11 × 1.82 × 106 × 81 × 10 –62

no
9 × 109 × 1.6 2 × 10 –38

63 × 10 –38
∴ yC 8 × 10 –19 10 –18
(b) Because of the net force, the hydrogen atom experiences an
acceleration such that
109
d 2 R  1 Ny 2e 2 4p 
mp = R– GNm 2p R 
dt 2  3 e o 3 
d 2R 1  1 Ny2e 2 4p 
Or, 2
= a 2 R where α 2 =  – GNm 2p 
dt m p  3 eo 3 
This has a solution R = Ae at + Be –at

As we are seeking an expansion, B = 0.
∴ R = Ae α t
d
.
⇒ R = α Ae αt = α R
he
Thus, the velocity is proportional to the distance from the centre.
1.27 (a) The symmetry of the problem suggests that the electric field is radial.
For points r < R, consider a spherical Gaussian surfaces. Then on
pu T
the surface
is
1
∫ Er .dS = ε o ∫V ρdv
re ER
bl
4π r 2Er =
1
εo
r
4π k ∫ r ′3dr ′
o
r
r
R
S
be C
1 4π k 4
= r
εo 4
S
o N
1
∴ Er = kr 2
4ε o
1
E (r ) = kr 2 rˆ
tt ©
4ε o
For points r > R, consider a spherical Gaussian surfaces’ of radius
r,
1
∫ Er .dS = ε o ∫ ρdv
V
R
4π k
4π r 2E r = ∫r
3
dr
εo o
no
4π k R 4
=
εo 4
k R4
∴ Er =
4ε o r 2
E (r ) = (k /4ε o ) ( R 4 / r 2 )rˆ
110
Answers
(b) The two protons must be on the opposite sides of the centre along
a diameter. Suppose the protons are at a distance r from the
centre.
R
Now, 4π ∫ kr ′3dr = 2e
o
4π k 4
1 r ∴ R = 2e
4
r 2e
O ∴k =
d
πR4
2 Consider the forces on proton 1. The attractive force due to the
he
charge distribution is
e 2e 2 r 2
–e Er = – kr 2rˆ = – rˆ
4ε o 4πε o R 4
pu T
is
e2 1
The repulsive force is rˆ
re ER
4πε o ( 2r )2
bl  e2
Net force is 
 4πε o 4r
This is zero such that
2
–
2e 2 r 2 
 rˆ
4πε o R 4 
be C
e2 2e 2 r 2
2
=
16πε or 4πε o R 4
o N
4R 4 R 4
Or, r 4 = =
32 8
tt ©
R
⇒r =
(8)1/ 4
R
Thus, the protons must be at a distance r = from the centre.
a b g 4
8
Q
1.28 (a) The electric field at γ due to plate α is – ˆ
x
S 2ε o
q
The electric field at γ due to plate β is ˆ
x
S 2ε o
Hence, the net electric field is
no
d
-Q q Q (Q – q )
E1 = ˆ)
(–x
2ε o S
(b) During the collision plates β & γ are together and hence must be at
one potential. Suppose the charge on β is q1 and on γ is q2. Consider
a point O. The electric field here must be zero.
Q
Electric field at 0 due to α = – ˆ
x
2ε oS
111
q1
Electric field at 0 due to β = – xˆ
2ε oS b g
q2
Electric Field at 0 due to γ = – xˆ °o
2ε o S
q1 q2
– ( Q + q2 ) q
∴ + 1 =0
2ε o S 2ε o S
⇒ q1 – q 2 = Q
d
Further, q1 + q2 = Q + q
⇒ q1 = Q + q /2
he
and q2 = q/2
Thus the charge on β and γ are Q + q/2 and q/2, respectively.
(c) Let the velocity be v at the distance d after the collision. If m is the
pu T
mass of the plate γ, then the gain in K.E. over the round trip must
is
be equal to the work done by the electric field.
re ER
After the collision, the electric field at γ is
bl
E2 = –
Q
2ε o S
xˆ +
(Q + q /2 ) ˆ
2ε o S
x=
q /2
2ε o S
ˆ
x
The work done when the plate γ is released till the collision is F1d
where F1 is the force on plate γ.
be C
The work done after the collision till it reaches d is F2d where F2 is
the force on plate γ .
o N
(Q – q ) Q
F1 = E1Q =
2ε o S
( q /2 )2
tt ©
and F2 = E 2q /2 =
2ε o S
∴ Total work done is
1 1
(Q – q ) Q + ( q /2 )2  d = ( Q – q /2 )2 d
2ε o S  2ε oS
d
⇒ (1/2)mv 2 = (Q – q /2 )2
2ε o S
1/ 2
 d 
∴ v = ( Q – q /2 )  
 m ε oS 
no
Qq [1esu of charge]2
1.29 (i) F = = 1dyne =
r2 [1cm]2
Or,
1 esu of charge = 1 (dyne)1/2 (cm)
Hence, [1 esu of charge] = [F]1/2 L = [MLT–2]1/2 L = M1/2 L3/2 T–1
[1 esu of charge] = M1/2 L3/2 T–1
Thus charge in cgs unit is expressed as fractional powers (1/2) of M
and (3/2) of L.
112
Answers
(ii) Consider the coloumb force on two charges, each of magnitude

1 esu of charge separated by a distance of 1 cm:
The force is then 1 dyne = 10–5 N.
This situation is equivalent to two charges of magnitude x C
separated by 10–2m.
This gives:
1 x2
F = .
4πε 0 10 –4
which should be 1 dyne = 10–5 N. Thus
d
1 x2 –5 1 10 –9 Nm 2
. = 10 ⇒ =
4πε 0 10 –4 4πε 0 x 2 C2
he
1
With x = , this yields
[3] × 109
pu T 1 Nm 2
is
= 10 –9 × [3]2 × 1018 = [3]2 × 109
4πε 0 C2
re ER
With [3] → 2.99792458, we get
bl 1
4πε 0
= 8.98755.... × 109
Nm 2
C2
exactly
be C
1.30 Net force F on q towards the centre O

o N
q2 2q 2 x
F =2 2
cos θ = – .
4πε 0r 4πε 0r 2 r
q
tt ©
q x
–2q 2 x
F =
–q d d –q 4πε 0 (d 2 + x 2 )3 / 2
–2q 2
≈ x = –kxfor x << d.
4πε 0d 3
Thus, the force on the third charge q is proportional to the
displacement and is towards the centre of the two other charges.
Therefore, the motion of the third charge is harmonic with frequency
2q 2 k
ω= =
4πε 0d 3m
no
1/ 2
 3 3

and hence T = 2π  8π ε 0md  .
2
ω  q 
1.31 (a) Slight push on q along the axis of the ring gives rise to the situation
shown in Fig (b). A and B are two points on the ring at the end of a
diameter.
113
–Q
Force on q due to line elements at A and B is Z
2π R Axis of the ring
– – – – – –Total charge –Q
–Q 1 1 –––– ––
––
F A + B = 2. .q. . .cos θ R
––
–––
2π R 4πε 0 r 2 q
–
––
– – – – –– – – – – – –
–Qq 1 z
= . 2 . 2 (a)
π R.4πε 0 ( z + R ) ( z + R 2 )1/ 2
2
Total force due to ring on q = (FA+B)(πR)

– Qq
d
z
=
4πε 0 (z + R 2 )3/2
2
he
–Qq for
z z << R
4πε 0
pu T
Thus, the force is propotional to negative of displacement. Motion
is
under such forces is harmonic.
(b) From (a)
re ER
bl
d 2z Qqz d 2z Qq
m 2
=– 3
or
... =– z
dt 4πε0 R dt 2 4πε0mR 3
be C
That is, ω 2 = Qq . Hence T = 2π 4πε 0mR

4πε 0mR 3 Qq (b)
o N
Chapter 2
2.1 (d)
tt ©
2.2 (c)
2.3 (c)
2.4 (c)
2.5 (a)
2.6 (c)
2.7 (b), (c), (d)
2.8 (a), (b), (c)

no
2.9 (b), (c)
2.10 (b), (c)
2.11 (a), (d)
2.12 (a), (b)
2.13 (c) and (d)
114
Answers
2.14 More.
2.15 Higher potential.
2.16 Yes, if the sizes are different.
2.17 No.
2.18 As electric field is conservative, work done will be zero in both the
cases.
2.19 Suppose this were not true. The potential just inside the surface
d
would be different from that at the surface resulting in a potential
gradient. This would mean that there are field lines pointing inwards
he
or outwards from the surface. These lines cannot at the other end be
again on the surface, since the surface is equipotential. Thus, this
is possible only if the other end of the lines are at charges inside,
contradicting the premise. Hence, the entire volume inside must be
pu T at the same potential.
is
re ER
2.20 C will decrease
bl Energy stored =
1
2
CV 2 and hence will increase.
Electric field will increase.

Charge stored will remain the same.
be C
U V will increase.
2.21 Consider any path from the charged conductor to the uncharged
o N
conductor along the electric field. The potential will continually decrease
along this path. A second path from the uncharged conductor to infinity
z will again continually lower the potential further. Hence this result.
tt ©
−qQ
2.22 U=
4π ε 0R 1 + z 2 R 2
z The variation of potential energy with z is shown in the figure.

P
r The charge – q displaced would perform oscillations. We cannot conclude
+ + + + + anything just by looking at the graph.
+ Q
+ +
+
+ +
R 1 Q
2.23
+
+ + V=
+ + + + 4πε 0 R + z2
2
no
2.24 To find the potential at distance r from the line consider the electric
field. We note that from symmetry the field lines must be radially
outward. Draw a cylindrical Gaussian surface of radius r and length l.
Then l
r
1
∫ E.dS = ε 0 λ l
115
1
Or E r 2π rl = λl
ε0
λ
⇒ Er =
2πε 0 r
Hence, if r0 is the radius,
r
λ r0
V (r) – V (r0 ) = − ∫ E.dl = ln
r0
2πε 0 r
For a given V,
d
r 2πε 0
ln =− [V(r) – V(r0 )]
he
r0 λ
−2πε0Vr0 / λ +2πε 0V(r) / λ
⇒ r = r0 e .e
The equipotential surfaces are cylinders of radius
pu T
is
−2πε0 [V(r)–V(r0 )]/ λ
r = r0 e
re ER
2.25 Let the plane be at a distance x from the origin. The potential at the
bl
point P is
1 q 1 q P z
− y
4πε 0 ( x + d /2 )2 + h 2 1/ 2 4πε 0 ( x − d /2 )2 + h 2 1/ 2
    h
be C
If this is to be zero. x
2q -q
1 1
o N
= -d/2 o x d/2
2 1/2 2 1/ 2
( x + d /2 ) + h  ( x − d /2 ) + h 
2 2
Or, (x-d/2)2 + h2 = (x+d/2)2 + h2

tt ©
⇒ x 2 − dx + d 2 /4 = x 2 + dx + d 2 /4
Or, 2dx = 0
⇒ x=0
The equation is that of a plane x = 0.
2.26 Let the final voltage be U: If C is the capacitance of the capacitor without
the dielectric, then the charge on the capacitor is
Q1 = CU
The capacitor with the dielectric has a capacitance εC. Hence the charge
on the capacitor is
Q2 = ε U = α CU 2
no
The initial charge on the capacitor that was charged is

Q0 = CU0
From the conservation of charges,
Q0 = Q1 + Q2
Or, CU0 = CU + α CU2
⇒α U 2 + U − u0 = 0
−1 ± 1 + 4αU 0
∴U =
2α
116
Answers
−1 ± 1 + 624
=
4
−1 ± 625
= volts
4
As U is positive
625 − 1 24
U = = = 6V
4 4
2.27 When the disc is in touch with the bottom plate, the entire plate is a
d
equipotential. A change q′ is transferred to the disc.
he
The electric field on the disc is
V
=
d
pu T
is
V 2
∴ q′ = −ε 0 πr
d
re ER
The force acting on the disc is
bl −
V
d
V2
× q′ = ε 0 2 π r 2
d
If the disc is to be lifted, then
be C
V2 2
ε0 π r = mg
d2
o N
mgd 2
⇒V =
πε 0r 2
tt ©
1  qd q d qu q d qu q d 
2.28 U=  – – 
4πε 0  r r r 
9×109 2
=
10 –15
(
1.6 ×10 –19 ) {(1 3 )
2
}
– ( 2 3 )(1 3 ) – ( 2 3 )(1 3 )
1 4  –14
= 2.304 × 10–13  –  = –7.68 ×10 J
 9 9 
= 4.8 × 105 eV = 0.48 MeV = 5.11 × 10–4 (mnc2)
2.29 Before contact
Q1 = σ .4π R 2
no
Q2 = σ .4π (2 R 2 ) = 4 (σ .4π R2 ) = 4Q1

After contact :
Q1′ + Q2′ = Q1 + Q2 = 5Q1 ,
=5(σ .4π R 2 )
117
They will be at equal potentials:
Q1′ Q2′
=
R 2R
∴Q2′ = 2Q′ .
(
∴ 3Q1′ = 5 σ .4π R 2 )
d
5 10
∴ Q1′ =
3
( )
σ .4π R 2 and Q 2′ =
3
(
σ .4π R 2 )
he
5
∴ σ1 = 5 3 σ and ∴ σ 2 = σ.
6
pu T
is
re ER
1
2.30 Initially : V ∝ and V1 + V2 = E
C
bl
⇒ V1 =3 V and V 2 =6V
∴ Q1 = C1V1 = 6C × 3 =18 µ C
be C
C1 K1 K2
() ()
Q2 = 9 µ C and Q3 = 0
o N
Later : Q2 = Q2′ + Q3 E = 9V C3 C2
tt ©
Q2
with C2V + C3V = Q2 ⇒V = = (3 2) V
C2 +C3
Q2′ = (9 2) µ C and Q3′ = (9 2) µ C
Q
2.31 σ=
π R2
1 σ .2π r dr
dU =
4πε 0 r 2 + z2
no
z
R
πσ 2rdr
∴U =
4πε 0 ∫ r 2 + z2
Q
O
118
Answers
2πσ  2 2
R 2πσ  2 2
= r + z = R +z – z 
z 4πε 0   O 4πε 0  
q1 d 2Q  2 2
= R +z – z 
4πε 0R 2  
O
q1 q2
+ =0
q2 –d 2.32 2 2 2 2 2 2
x + y + (z – d ) x + y + (z + d )
d
q1 – q2
he
∴ =
2 2 2 2 2 2
x + y + (z – d ) x + y + (z + d )
Thus, to have total potential zero, q1 and q2 must have opposite
pu T
is
signs. Squaring and simplifying, we get.
re ER
 ( q q )2 + 1 
bl
x 2 + y2 + z 2 +  1 2 2  (2zd ) + d 2 = 0
 ( q1 q2 ) – 1 
  q12 + q12  
be C
This is the equation of a sphere with centre at  0,0, –2d  2 2 .

  q1 – q1  
o N
U Note : if q1 = –q2 ⇒ Then z = 0, which is a plane through mid-point.
 – q – q 2 
2
1
tt ©
O 2.33 U=  + 
4πε 0  (d – x ) (d – x ) 
–q 2 2d
U=
4πε 0 (d 2
– x2 )
dU –q 2 .2d 2x
= . 2
dx 4π ∈0 d – x2
2
( )
2q 2 dU
no
U0 = = 0 at x = 0
4πε 0d dx
x = 0 is an equilibrium point.
d2U  –2dq 2   2 8x 2 
=  2 2
– 2 2 3
2
dx  4π ∈0   d – x 2 ( ) (d – x ) 
 
119
 –2dq 2  1  2
=  2 ( 2
2 3 2 d – x
2
) – 8 x 2 
 4π ∈0  ( d – x )
At x = 0
d 2U  –2dq 2   1  2
=   (2d ) , which is < 0.
dx 2  4π ∈0   d 6 
Hence, unstable equilibrium.
d
Chapter 3
he
3.1 (b)
3.2 (a)
pu T
is
3.3 (c)
re ER
(b)
bl
3.4
3.5 (a)
3.6 (a)
be C
3.7 (b), (d)
(a), (d)
o N
3.8
3.9 (a), (b)
3.10 (b), (c)

tt ©
3.11 (a), (c)
3.12 When an electron approaches a junction, in addition to the uniform

E that it normally faces (which keep the drift velocity v d fixed), there
are accumulation of charges on the surface of wires at the junction.
These produce electric field. These fields alter direction of momentum.
3.13 Relaxation time is bound to depend on velocities of electrons and

ions. Applied electric field affects the velocities of electrons by speeds
at the order of 1mm/s, an insignificant effect. Change in T, on the
other hand, affects velocities at the order of 102 m/s. This can affect
no
τ significantly.
[ρ = ρ(E,T ) in which E dependence is ignorable for ordinary applied
voltages.]
3.14 The advantage of null point method in a Wheatstone bridge is that the
resistance of galvanometer does not affect the balance point and there
is no need to determine current in resistances and galvanometer and
the internal resistance of a galvanometer. Runknown can be calculated
120
Answers
applying Kirchhoff ’s rules to the circuit. We would need additional

accurate measurement of all the currents in resistances and
galvanometer and internal resistance of the galvanometer.
3.15 The metal strips have low resistance and need not be counted in the
potentiometer length l1 of the null point. One measures only their lengths
along the straight segments (of lengths 1 meter each). This is easily
done with the help of centimeter rulings or meter ruler and leads to
accurate measurements.
3.16 Two considerations are required: (i) cost of metal, and (ii) good
d
conductivity of metal. Cost factor inhibits silver. Cu and Al are the next
best conductors.
he
3.17 Alloys have low value of temperature co-efficient (less temperature
sensitivity) of resistance and high resistivity.
3.18
pu T
Power wasted PC = I2RC
is
where RC is the resistance of the connecting wires.
re ER
P2
PC = RC
bl
V2
In order to reduce PC, power should be transmitted at high voltage.
3.19 If R is increased, the current through the wire will decrease and hence
the potential gradient will also decrease, which will result in increase in
be C
balance length. So J will shift towards B.
3.20 (i) Positive terminal of E1 is connected at X and E1 > E.

o N
(ii) Negative terminal of E1 is connected at X.

V
3.21
tt ©
E E
3.22 I = ; = 10I
R + nR R + R
no
1+ n 1+ n
= 10 = n =n
1 n +1
1+
n
∴ n = 10.
1 1 1 R min R min R min R

3.23 = + ....... + , = + + ....... + min > 1
R p R1 Rn RP R1 R2 Rn
121
and RS = R1 + ...... + Rn ≥ Rmax.

In Fig. (b), Rmin provides an equivalent route as in Fig. (a) for current.
But in addition there are (n – 1) routes by the remaining (n – 1) resistors.
Current in Fig.(b) > current in Fig. (a). Effective Resistance in
Fig. (b) < Rmin. Second circuit evidently affords a greater resistance. You
can use Fig. (c) and (d) and prove Rs > Rmax.
d
Rmin Rmax Rmax
he
Rmin
pu T
is
V V V
re ER
V
bl
(a) (b) (c) (d)
6–4
3.24 I = = 0.2 A A B
2+8
be C
P.D. across E1 = 6 – 0.2 × 2 = 5.6 V

E1 E2
P.D. across E2 = VAB = 4 + 0.2 × 8 = 5.6 V
o N
Point B is at a higher potential than A
E+E
3.25 I =
R + r1 + r2
tt ©
2E
V1 = E – Ir1 = E – r1 = 0
r1 + r2 + R
or E = 2Er1
r1 + r2 + R
2r1
1=
r1 + r2 + R
r1 + r2 + R = 2r1
R = r1 – r2
no
ρl
3.26 RA =
π (10 –3 × 0.5)2
ρl
RB =
π [(10 ) – (0.5 × 10 –3 )2 ]
–3 2
R A (10 –3 )2 – (0.5 × 10 –3 )2
= =3:1
RB (.5 × 10 –3 )2
122
Answers
3.27 We can think of reducing entire network to a simple one for any
branch R as shown in Fig.
Veff
Then current through R is I =
R Reff + R
Dimensionally Veff = Veff (V1, V2, ...... Vn) has a dimension of voltage and
Reff = Reff (R1, R2, ....... Rm) has a dimension of resistance.
I Veff Therefore if all are increased n-fold
Reff
new
Veff = nVeff , Reff
new
= n R eff
d
and Rnew = nR.
Current thus remains the same.
he
3.28 Applying Kirchhoff’s junction rule:
I1 = I + I2
Kirchhoff’s loop rule gives:
pu T
10 = IR + 10I1....(i)
is
2 = 5I2 – RI = 5 (I1 – I) – RI
re ER
4 = 10I1 – 10I – 2RI..... (ii)
bl
 10 
(i) – (ii) ⇒ 6 = 3RI + 10I or, 2 = I  R + 
 3 
2 = (R+ Reff)I Comparing with Veff = (R + Reff)I
and Veff = 2V
be C
10
Reff = Ω.
3
o N
R R
2V
tt ©
I1
I
5W I2
I2 10W Reff
10V Veff
3.29 Power consumption = 2units/hour = 2KW = 2000J/s
P 2000
I = = ; 9A
V 220
no
Power loss in wire = RI2 J/s

l 2 10
= ρ I = 1.7 × 10–8 × × 81 J/s
A π × 10–6
4 J/s
= 0.2%
ρ Al
Power loss in Al wire = 4 = 1.6 × 4 = 6.4J/s = 0.32%
ρ Cu
123
3.30 Let R′ be the resistance of the potentiometer wire.
10 × R ′
<8⇒ 10R ′ < 400 + 8R′
50 + R ′
2R ′ < 400 or R′ < 200Ω.
10 × R ′
> 8 ⇒ 2R ′ > 80 ⇒ R′ > 40
10 + R ′
d
3
10 × R′
4 < 8 ⇒ 7.5R′ < 80 + 8R′
he
10 + R ′
R′ > 160 ⇒ 160 < R′ < 200.

Any R′ between 160Ω and 200Ω will achieve.
pu T
Potential drop across 400 cm of wire > 8V.
is
Potential drop across 300 cm of wire < 8V.
re ER
φ × 400 > 8V (φ → potential gradient)
φ × 300 < 8V
2
bl
φ > 2V/m
< 2 V/m.
3
be C
6
3.31 (a) I = = 1 A = nevd A
6
o N
1 1
vd = 29 –19 –6
= × 10 –4 m/s
10 × 1.6 × 10 × 10 1.6
1
tt ©
K .E = m e vd2 × nAl
2
1 1
= × 9.1 × 10 –31 × × 10 –8 × 1029 × 10 –6 × 10 –1 ; 2 × 10 –17 J
2 2.56
(b) Ohmic loss = RI2 = 6 × 12 = 6 J/s

2 × 10 –17
All of KE of electrons would be lost in s ; 10 –17 s
6
Chapter 4
no
4.1 (d)
4.2 (a)
4.3 (a)
4.4 (d)
4.5 (a)
124
Answers
4.6 (d)
4.7 (a), (b)
4.8 (b), (d)
4.9 (b), (c)
4.10 (b), (c), (d)
4.11 (a), (b), (d)
d
4.12 For a charge particle moving perpendicular to the magnetic field:
mv 2
he
= qvB
R
qB v
∴ = =ω
pu T m R
is
re ER
∴ [ω ] = 
qB   v 
= = [T ]–1.
 m   R 
4.13
bl
dW=F.d l = 0
⇒ F.vdt = 0
be C
⇒ F.v = 0
F must be velocity dependent which implies that angle between F and
o N
v is 90°. If v changes (direction) then (directions) F should also change

so that above condition is satisfied.
4.14 Magnetic force is frame dependent. Net acceleraton arising from this is
tt ©
however frame independent (non - relativistic physics)for inertial frames.
4.15 Particle will accelerate and decelerate altenatively. So the radius of path
in the Dee’s will remain unchanged.
4.16 At O2, the magnetic field due to I1 is along the y-axis. The second wire is
along the y-axis and hence the force is zero.
1 ˆ ˆ ˆ µ0 I
4.17 B= ( i+j+k)
4 2R
 eB 
no
–1
4.18 No dimensionless quantity [T ] = [ω ] = 
 m 
4.19 E = E 0 î, E0 > 0, B = B 0 k

ˆ
4.20 Force due to d l2 on d l1 is zero.
Force due to d l1 on d l2 is non-zero.
125
4.21 iG (G + R1) = 2 for 2V range R1 R2 R3

G
iG (G + R1+ R2) = 20 for 20V range
and iG (G + R1+ R2 + R3) = 200 for 200V range
Gives R1 = 1990Ω
R2 = 18 kΩ
and R3 = 180 kΩ
4.22 F = BIl Sin θ = BIl 2V 20V 200V
µo I
B=
2π h
d
µoI2l
F = mg =
he
2π h P Q
2 –7
µoI l 4π × 10 × 250 × 25 × 1 h
h = =
2π mg 2π × 2.5 × 10–3 × 9.8
pu T
is
= 51 × 10–4
h = 0.51 cm
re ER
∑τ =0
bl
4.23 When the field is off
Mgl = Wcoil l
500 g l = Wcoil l
Wcoil = 500 × 9.8 N
be C
When the magnetic field is switched on

Mgl + mgl = Wcoil l + IBL sin 90°l
mgl = BIL l
o N
BIL 0.2 × 4.9 × 1 × 10 –2

m= = = 10 –3 kg
g 9.8
=1g
tt ©
B
V0 d V ldB n̂
4.24 F1 = i1lB = lB τ1 = F1 = 0 B
R 2 2 2 2R
i1
F1 d n̂ F1
V d V ldB
45°
F2 = i 2lB = 0 lB τ2 = F2 = 0
2R 2 2 4 2R l
F2 F2
Net torque τ = τ1 – τ 2
1 V0 AB
τ =
4 2 R V0
Side view
no
Front view
4.25 As B is along the x axis, for a circular orbit the momenta of the two
particles are in the y - z plane. Let p1 and p2 be the momentum of the
electron and positron, respectively. Both of them define a circle of
radius R. They shall define circles of opposite sense. Let p1 make an
angle θ with the y axis p2 must make the same angle. The centres of
the repective circles must be perpendicular to the momenta and at a
distance R. Let the center of the electron be at Ce and of the positron
at Cp. The coordinates of Ce is
126
Answers
The coordinates of Ce is
Ce ≡ (0, – R sinθ , R cosθ )
The coordinates of Cp is
3
Z Cp ≡ (0, – R sinθ , R–R cosθ )
2
The circles of the two shall not overlap if the distance between the two
centers are greater than 2R.
1.5 R Let d be the distance between Cp and Ce.
R 2
3
Then d 2 = (2RSinθ )2 +  R – 2R cosθ 
d
Ce
Cp 2 
he
y
q 92
= 4R 2 Sin2θ + R – 6R 2 cosθ + 4R 2 cos2 θ
4
B
9 2
pu T = 4R 2 + R – 6R 2 cosθ
is
4
x
Since d has to be greater than 2R
re ER
d2 > 4R2
bl ⇒ 4R 2 +
9
9 2
4
R – 6R 2 cosθ > 4 R 2
be C
⇒ > 6 cosθ
4
3
Or, cosθ < .
o N
8
4.26
tt ©
n=4 n=3 n=2
3 2 3 3 2
Area: A= a A = a2 A= a
4 4
CurrentI is same for all
Magnetic moment m = n I A
∴ m =Ia 2 3 3a2I 3 3a 2I
no
(Note: m is in a geometric series)

4.27 (a) B (z) points in the same direction on z - axis and hence J (L) is a
monotonically increasing function of L.
(b) J(L) + Contribution from large distance on contour C = µ0I
∴ asL → ∞
Contribution from large distance → 0(asB 1/r 3 )
J ( ∞ ) − µ0 I
127
µ0 IR 2
(c) B z =
2( z 2 + R 2 )3 / 2
∞ ∞ µ0 IR 2
∫– ∞ B z dz = ∫– ∞ 2(z 2 + R 2 )3 / 2 dz
Put z = Rtanθ dz = R sec2 θ d θ
∞ µ 0I π /2
∴ ∫ B z dz = ∫–π / 2 cosθ dθ = µ0I O
–∞ 2 –L –L
(d) B(z)square < B (z)circular coil
d
∴ ℑ ( L )square < ℑ ( L )circular coil
But by using arguments as in (b)
he
ℑ ( ∞ )square = ℑ (∞ )circular
4.28 iG .G = (i1 – iG) (S1+ S2+ S3) for i1 = 10mA
pu T
iG (G + S1) = (i2 –iG) (S2+ S3) for i2 = 100mA
is
and iG (G + S1+S2) = (i3 – iG) (S3) for i3 = 1A
re ER
gives S1 = 1W, S2 = 0.1W and S3 = 0.01W
bl
4.29 (a) zero
µ0 i
(b) perpendicular to AO towards left.
2π R
be C
µ0 i
(c) perpendicular to AO towards left.
π R
o N
Chapter 5
tt ©
5.1 (c)
5.2 (a)
5.3 (c)
5.4 (b)
5.5 (b)
5.6 (a), (d)
5.7 (a), (d)
5.8 (a), (d)
no
5.9 (a), (c), (d)

5.10 (b), (c), (d)
eh eh h
µp ≈ µ ≈ ,h =
5.11 2m p and e 2m e 2π
µe >> µp because mp >> me.
128
Answers
5.12 Bl = µ0 M l = µ0 ( I + I M ) and H = 0 = I
Ml = IM = 106 × 0.1 = 105 A.
ρN 28g /22.4Lt 3.5

5.13 x α densityρ . Now = = × 10 –3 = 1.6 × 10–4.
ρ Cu 8g /cc 22.4
xN
= 5 × 10 –4 (from given data).
x Cu
Hence major difference is accounted for by density.
d
5.14 Diamagnetism is due to orbital motion of electrons developing
magnetic moments opposite to applied field and hence is not much
he
affected by temperature.
Paramagnetism and ferromagnetism is due to alignments of atomic
magnetic moments in the direction of the applied field. As temperature
pu T increases, this aligment is disturbed and hence susceptibilities of both
is
decrease as temperature increases.
re ER
5.15 (i) Away from the magnet. z
N S
bl
(ii) Magnetic moment is from left to right
ds
µ 3 m.rˆ ˆ r̂
5.16 B= 0 ,m = mk
4π r 3
q
be C
2
m
N
ds = rˆ.r sinθ dθ dφ y
0 ≤ θ ≤ π ,0 ≤ φ ≤ π
o N
f
S S µ 0m 3 cos θ 2
∫ B.ds = 4π ∫ r 3 r sinθ dθ dφ
Ñ
x
tt ©
= 0[due to θ integral] .
5.17 Net m = 0 . Only possibility is shown in Fig.
N N m
5.18 E (r) = c B (r), p = . Mass and moment of inertia of dipoles are
c
S equal.
I 1 1 1
5.19 T = 2π I′ = × I and m ′ = m . T′ = T
mB 2 4 2 2
no
5.20 Consider a line of B through the bar magnet. It must be closed. Let C
be the amperian loop.
P P
B
∫ H.dl = ∫ µ0 .dl > 0
Q Q
∫ H.dl = 0
Ñ
PQP
129
Q C
∫ H.dl < 0
p
P Q
P → Q is inside the bar.
Hence H is making an obtuse angle with dl.
5.21 (i) Along z axis
S N
µ0 2m
B=
4π r 3
d
R R
µ0 µm 1 1 1
2m ∫ 3 = 0  –   2 – 2 
dz
∫ B.d l = 4π 2π  2   R a 
a z
he
a
(ii) Along the quarter circle of radius R
µ0 – m.θˆ – µ0 m
B 0/ = = ( –sinθ ) z
4π R 3 4π R 3
pu T
is
µ 0m
B.dl = sinθ dθ
re ER
4π R 2
bl
π
2 ur uur µ0m
∫ B.dl = 4π R 2 R
0
a1
be C
(iii) Along x-axis

µ0  –m 
B=   O a R x x
4π  x 3 
o N
∫ B.d l = 0
(iv) Along the quarter circle of radius a
tt ©
– µ0m – µ0m 2 – µ0m

B.d l =
4π a 2
sinθ dθ , ∫ B.d l = – 4π a 2 ∫ sinθ dθ = 4π a 2
0
Add ∫ B.d l = 0
Ñ
C
5.22 χ is dimensionless.
χ depends on magnetic moment induced when H is turned on. H
couples to atomic electrons through its charge e. The effect on m is via
current I which involves another factor of ‘e’. The combination " µ0e 2 "
no
does not depend on the “charge” Q dimension.
χ = µ0e 2m α v β R γ
2
1 e 1 e2 Energy length
µ0c 2 = 2
~ 2 .R ~
c ε0 c ε 0R c2
130
Answers
β
ML3 T –2 α  L  γ 0
[ χ ] = M0L0T0Q0 = M   LQ
L2T –2 T
α = –1, β = 0, γ = –1
µ0 e 2 10 –6 × 10 –38
χ= ~ ~ 10 –4 .
mR 10 –30 × 10 –10
µ0 m
d
5.23 (i) B = (4 cos 2 θ + sin2 θ )1 / 2
4π R 3
he
2
B
= 3 cos2 θ + 1 , minimum at θ = π .
2
 µ0  2 2
  m
 4π R 3 
pu T B is minimum at magnetic equator.
is
re ER
BV
(ii) tan (dip angle) = = 2 cot
bl
BH
π
at θ = dip angle vanishes. Magnetic equator is again the
2
be C
locus.
BV
(iii) Dip angle is ± 45° when =1
o N
BH
2 cot θ = 1
w
N θ = tan–12 is the locus.
Refer to the adjacent Fig.
tt ©
5.24
1. P is in S (needle will point both north)

11.3°
P Declination = 0
GE P is also on magnetic equator.
Q ∴ dip = 0
ME 2. Q is on magnetic equator.
∴ dip = 0
but declination = 11.3°.

no
L L
5.25 n1 = n2 =
2π R 4a
m 1 = n 1IA 1 m 2 = n 2 IA 2
131
L L L
= Iπ R = Ia 2 = Ia
2π R 4a 4
MR 2
I1 = (moment of inertia about an axis through the diameter)
2
Ma 2
I2 =
12
d
m 1B m 2B
ω12 = ω22 =
I1 I2
he
m1 m 2
=
I1 I2
pu T
is
L
re ER
Ia
LR I 4 3π
× = ⇒a = R.
bl
2 2 .
2π MR Ma 4
2 12
be C
Chapter 6
6.1 (c)
o N
6.2 (b)
6.3 (a)
tt ©
6.4 (d)
6.5 (a)
6.6 (b)
6.7 (a), (b), (d)
6.8 (a), (b), (c)
6.9 (a), (d)
6.10 (b), (c)

no
6.11 No part of the wire is moving and so motional e.m.f. is zero. The
magnet is stationary and hence the magnetic field does not change
with time. This means no electromotive force is produced and hence
no current will flow in the circuit.
6.12 The current will increase. As the wires are pulled apart the flux will
leak through the gaps. Lenz’s law demands that induced e.m.f. resist
this decrease, which can be done by an increase in current.
132
Answers
6.13 The current will decrease. As the iron core is inserted in the solenoid,
the magnetic field increases and the flux increases. Lent’s law implies
that induced e.m.f. should resist this increase, which can be achieved
by a decrease in current.
6.14 No flux was passing through the metal ring initially. When the
current is switched on, flux passes through the ring. According to
Lenz’s law this increase will be resisted and this can happen if the
ring moves away from the solenoid. One can analyse this in more
detail (Fig 6.5). If the current in the solenoid is as shown, the flux
(downward) increases and this will cause a counterclockwise current
d
(as seen form the top in the ring). As the flow of current is in the
opposite direction to that in the solenoid, they will repel each other
he
and the ring will move upward.
6.15 When the current in the solenoid decreases a current flows in the
same direction in the metal ring as in the solenoid. Thus there will
pu T be a downward force. This means the ring will remain on the
is
cardboard. The upward reaction of the cardboard on the ring will
re ER
increase.
bl 6.16 For the magnet, eddy currents are produced in the metallic pipe.
These currents will oppose the motion of the magnet. Therefore
magnet’s downward acceleration will be less than the acceleration
due to gravity g. On the other hand, an unmagnetised iron bar will
be C
not produce eddy currents and will fall with an acceleration g. Thus
the magnet will take more time.
o N
y
6.17 Flux through the ring
k̂
φ = Bo ( πa 2 )cos ωt
tt ©
x
(0,0,0) (a,0,0) ε = B( πa 2 )ω sin ωt
I = B( πa 2 )ω sin ωt / R
Current at
π B (π a 2 ) ω
t= ; I = along ĵ
2ω R
S2 π
t = ; I =0
ω
S1
3π B ( πa 2 ) ω along ˆ .
t = ; I = –j
c 2ω R
no
6.18 One gets the same answer for flux. Flux can be throught of as the number
B D B of magnetic field lines passing through the surface (we draw dN = B ∆ A
P
lines in an area ∆ A ⊥to B), As lines of of B cannot end or start in space
R B (they form closed loops) number of lines passing through surface S1 must
BC v be the same as the number of lines passing through the surface S2.
q 6.19 Motional electric field E along the dotted line CD (⊥ to both v and B and
Q B B along v × B) = vB
133
E.M.F. along PQ = (length PQ)×(Field along PQ)

d
= × vB cos θ = dvB .
cos θ
Therefore,
dvB
I = and is independent of q.
R
6.20 Maximum rate of change of current is in AB. So maximum back emf
will be obtained between 5s < t <10s.
d
 dI 
If u = L 1/5  for t = 3 s, = 1/5  (L is a constant)
 
he
dt
3 3
For 5s < t < 10s u1 = – L = – L = –3e
5 5
pu T
Thus at t = 7 s, u1 = –3 e.
is
For 10s < t < 30s
re ER
2 L 1
u2 = L = = e
bl
20 10 2
For t > 30s u2 = 0
10 –2
6.21 Mutual inductance = = 5mH
be C
Flux = 5 × 10 –3 × 1 = 5 × 10 –3 Wb.
o N
y
6.22 Let us assume that the parallel wires at are y = 0 and y = d. At t = 0, AB
has x=0 and moves with a velocity viˆ .
At time t, wire is at x (t) = vt. A
tt ©
C
Motional e.m.f. = ( Bo sin ωt ) vd ( – ˆj ) v
E.m.f due to change in field (along OBAC)
= – Boω cos ωt x (t )d
O B x
Total e.m.f = – Bod [ω x cos (ωt ) + v sin (ωt )]
Bo d
Along OBAC, Current (clockwise) = (ω x cos ωt + v sin ωt )
R
Force needed along î = Bo d (ω x cos ωt + v sin ωt ) × d × Bo sin ωt

R
no
Bo 2d 2
= (ω x cos ωt + v sin ωt ) sin ωt .
R
6.23 (i) Let the wire be at x = x (t) at time t.
Flux = B (t) l x (t)
dφ dB (t )
E=– =– l x (t ) – B (t ) l .v (t ) (second term due to motional emf)
dt dt
134
Answers
1
I = E
R
l B (t )  dB 
Force = – l x (t ) – B (t ) l v (t )  î
R  dt 
d 2x l 2B dB l 2 B 2 dx
m = – x ( t ) –
y dt 2 R dt R dt
dB d 2 x l 2B 2 dx
A X (ii) = 0, + =0
B dt 2
d
dt mR dt
B
R
B l dv l 2B 2
v =0
he
+
Y x dt mR
C x (t) D
 –l 2B 2t 
pu T v = A exp  
is
 mR 
re ER
At t = 0, v = u
v (t) = u exp (–l2B2t/mR).
bl 2
(iii) I R =
B 2l 2v 2 (t )
R 2
×R =
B 2l 2 2
R
u exp(–2l 2B 2t /mR )
be C
B 2l 2 2 mR
t
Power lost = ∫ I 2R dt = u  –(l 2 B 2t/mR ) 
0
R 2l 2 B 2 1 – e 
o N
m 2 m 2
= u – v (t )
2 2
= decrease in kinetic energy.
tt ©
6.24 Between time t = 0 and t =

π
, the rod OP will make contact with the
4ω
side BD. Let the length OQ of the contact at some time t such that
A 2l B π
0<t < be x. The flux through the area ODQ is
4ω
P
l 1 1
x Q φ = B QD×OD= B l tan θ × l
2 2
q
C O l D
no
1
P = Bl 2 tan θ where θ = ωt
A 2l B 2
Q
dφ 1 2
Thus the magnitude of the emf generated is ε = = Bl ω sec 2ωt
l x dt 2
l
ε
q The current is I = where R is the resistance of the rod in contact.
R
C O R D
135
λl
R = λx =
cos ωt
1 Bl 2ω Bl ω
∴ I = sec 2ωt cos ωt =
2 λl 2λ cos ωt
π 3π
For <t < the rod is in contact with the side
4ω ω A 2l B
AB. Let the length of the rod in contact (OQ) be x. The
d
P
 2 1 l2 
flux through OQBD is φ =  l +  B where θ = ωt
he
 2 tan θ  l
x l
Thus the magnitude of emf generated is
q
pu T
d φ 1 2 sec ωt
= Bl ω
2
C O l D
is
ε=
dt 2 tan2 ωt
re ER
bl
ε ε ε sin ωt 1 Blω
The current is I = = = =
R λx λl 2 λ sin ωt
3π π
be C
For <t < the rod will be in touch with OC. The Flux through
ω ω
 l2 
o N
OQABD is φ =  2l 2 – B
 2 tan ωt 
Thus the magnitude of emf
tt ©
dφ Bωl 2 sec 2 ωt
ε= =
dt 2 tans ωt
ε ε 1 Bl ω
I= ==
R λ x 2 λ sin ωt
A l B
6.25 At a distance r from the wire,
dr
µI x
Field B (r ) = o (out of paper).
no
2π r
D r C
xo
Total flux through the loop is
I (t)
µo I x dr µo I x
2π x∫ r
Flux = l = ln
2π x o
o
136
Answers
1 dI ε µl λ x
= =I = o ln
R dt R 2π R x 0
6.26 If I (t) is the current in the loop.
1 dφ
I (t ) =
R dt
A L1 B
If Q is the charge that passed in time t,
d
L2 + x
dQ dQ 1 dφ
I (t ) = or =
he
dt dt R dt
D x C
I (t) 1
Integrating Q (t 1 ) – Q ( t 2 ) = φ (t1 ) – φ (t 2 )
R
pu T
is
re ER
L2 + x
µo dx ′
φ (t1 ) = L1 ∫ I (t1 )
bl
2π x
x′
µo L1 L +x
= I (t1 ) ln 2
be C
2π x
The magnitute of charge is

o N
µo L1 L 2 + x
Q= ln [ I o – 0]
2π x
tt ©
µo L1I 1  L 2 + x 
= ln  .
2π  x 
B.π a 2
6.27 2π bE = E.M .F = where E is the electric field generated around
∆t
the ring.
 B πa 2 
Torque = b × Force = Q E b = Q  b
 2πb ∆t 
no
Ba 2
=Q
2 ∆t
If ∆L is the change in angular momentum
Ba 2
∆L = Torque × ∆t = Q
2
137
Initial angular momentum = 0
2 QBa 2
Final angular momentum = mb ω =
2
QBa 2
ω= .
2mb 2
d 2x B cos θ d  dx 
m = mg sin θ –   × ( Bd ) cos θ
d
6.28
dt 2 R  dt 
he
dv B 2d 2
= g sin θ – (cos θ)2 v
dt mR
dv B 2d 2
pu T
is
+ (cos θ )2 v = g sin θ
dt mR
re ER
v=
bl
g sin θ
 B 2d 2 cos2 θ 

 mR


+ A exp
 B 2d 2
–
 mR

(cos2 θ)t  (A is a constant to be

be C
determine by initial conditions)
mgR sin θ   B 2d 2 
o N
= 1 – exp – (cos2 θ)t  

B 2d 2 cos2 θ   mR 
6.29 If Q (t) is charge on the capacitor (note current flows from A to B)

tt ©
vBd Q X A
I = –
R RC S
B v
C d
B
Q dQ vBd
⇒ + = Y B
RC dt R
Q = vBdC + Ae – t / RC
∴
⇒ Q = vBdC [1 – e – t / RC ]
(At time t = 0, Q = 0 = A = –vBdc). Differentiating, we get

no
vBd –t / RC X A
I = e
R S B
B
v d
dI L
6.30 –L + vBd = IR B B
dt
B
B B
138
Answers
dI
L + IR = vBd
dt
vBd
I = + A e – Rt / 2
R
vBd
At t=0 I = 0⇒ A = –
R
vBd
d
I= (1 – e – Rt / L ) .
R
he
dφ dz
6.31 = rate of change in flux = (π l2) Bo l = IR.
dt dt
pu T
I =
π l 2 Bo λ
v
is
R
re ER
(π l 2λ) 2 Bo 2v 2
bl
Energy lost/second = I2 R =
R
dz
This must come from rate of change in PE = m g = mgv
dt
be C
(as kinetic energy is constant for v= constant)
(π l 2λ B0 ) 2 v 2
o N
Thus, mgv =
R
mgR
Or, v = .
tt ©
( π l 2λ Bo )2
6.32 Magnetic field due to a solnoid S, B = µ0nI
Magnetic flux in smaller coil φ = NBA where A = πb 2
–d φ –d
So e = = (NBA )
e dt dt
d (B) d
= – N πb 2 = – N πb 2 (µ 0n I)
dt dt
dI
= – N πb 2µ 0n
no
t dt
d
= – Nn πµ0b 2 (mt 2 + C) = – µ0Nn πb 2 2mt
dt
e = – µ 0 Nn πb 2 2mt
Negative sign signifies opposite nature of induced emf. The magnitude
of emf varies with time as shown in the Fig.
139
Chapter 7
7.1 (b)
7.2 (c)
7.3 (c)
7.4 (b)
7.5 (c)
d
7.6 (c)
he
7.7 (a)
7.8 (a), (d)
(c), (d)
pu T
is
7.9
re ER
7.10 (a), (b), (d)
bl
7.11 (a), (b), (c)
7.12 (c), (d)
(a), (d)
be C
7.13
7.14 Magnetic energy analogous to kinetic energy and electrical energy

analogous to potential energy.
o N
7.15 At high frequencies, capacitor ≈ short circuit (low reactance) and

inductor ≈ open circuit (high reactance). Therefore, the equivalent
circuit Z ≈ R1 + R 3 as shown in the Fig.
tt ©
R1
R1 R3
R2 R3
⇒
~ ~
7.16 (a) Yes, if rms voltage in the two circuits are same then at resonance,
the rms current in LCR will be same as that in R circuit.
no
(d) No, because R ≤ Z ,so I a ≥ I b .
7.17 Yes, No.

1
7.18 Bandwidth corresponds to frequencies at which I m = I max
2
≈ 0.7 I max .
140
Answers
It is shown in the Fig.
∆ω = 1.2 – 0.8 = 0.4 rad/s

1.0
Im (A)
0.5
Dw
7.19 Irms = 1.6A (shown in Fig. by dotted line)
0
.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
w(rad/s)
3
2
d
1
I (A) 0 T 2T
he
–1
–2 t
–3
pu T
is
7.20 From negative to zero to positive; zero at resonant frequency.
re ER
7.21 (a) A
bl
(b) Zero
(c) L or C or LC
be C
7.22 An a.c current changes direction with the source frequency and
the attractive force would average to zero. Thus, the a.c ampere
must be defined in terms of some property that is independent of
o N
the direction of current. Joule’s heating effect is such property and

hence it is used to define rms value of a.c.
7.23 XL = ωL = 2pfL
tt ©
= 3.14Ω
Z = R 2 + L2
= (3.14)2 + (1)2 = 10.86
; 3.3Ω
ωL
tan φ = = 3.14
R
φ = tan –1(3.14)
no
; 72°
72 × π
; rad.
180
φ 72 × π 1
Timelag ∆t = = = s
ω 180 × 2π × 50 250
141
7.24 PL = 60W, IL = 0.54A
60
VL = = 110V.
0.54
1
The transformer is step-down and have input voltage. Hence
2
1
ip = × I 2 = 0.27A.
2
d
7.25 A capacitor does not allow flow of direct current through it as the
resistance across the gap is infinite. When an alternating voltage is
he
applied across the capacitor plates, the plates are alternately charged
and discharged. The current through the capacitor is a result of this
changing voltage (or charge). Thus, a capacitor will pass more current
pu T
through it if the voltage is changing at a faster rate, i.e. if the frequency
is
of supply is higher. This implies that the reactance offered by a capacitor
is less with increasing frequency; it is given by 1/ωC.
re ER
An inductor opposes flow of current through it by developing a back
bl
7.26
emf according to Lenz’s law. The induced voltage has a polarity so as
to maintain the current at its present value. If the current is decreasing,
the polarity of the induced emf will be so as to increase the current
and vice versa. Since the induced emf is proportional to the rate of
be C
change of current, it will provide greater reactance to the flow of current

if the rate of change is faster, i.e. if the frequency is higher. The reactance
of an inductor, therefore, is proportional to the frequency, being given
o N
by ωL.
V2 50,000
7.27 Power P = ⇒ = 25 = Z
tt ©
Z 2000
Z2 = R2 + (XC – XL)2 = 625
XC – XL 3
tan φ = =–
R 4
2
3 25 2
625 = R 2 +  – R  = R
 4  16
no
R2 = 400 ⇒ R = 20Ω
XC– XL = –15Ω
V 223
I = = 9 A.
Z 25
IM = 2 × 9=12.6 A.
142
Answers
If R, XC, XL are all doubled, tan φ does not change.

Z is doubled, current is halfed.
Power drawn is halfed.
7.28 (i) Resistance of Cu wires, R
l 1.7×10 –8 ×20000
=ρ = 2
= 4Ω
A  1 –4
π ×   × 10
2
d
106
I at 220 V: VI = 106 W ; I = = 0.45 × 104 A
he
220
RI2 = Power loss
pu T = 4 × (0.45)2 × 108 W
is
> 106 W
re ER
bl
This method cannot be used for transmission
(ii) V′I′ = 106 W = 11000 I′

be C
1
I′ = × 102
1.1
o N
1
RI′2 = × 4 × 104 =3.3×104 W
1.21
tt ©
4
Fraction of power loss = 3.3 × 10 =3.3%
6
10
vm sin ωt
7.29 Ri1 = vm sin ωt i1 =
R
q2 dq 2
+ L 22 = vm sin ωt
C dt
Let q2 = qm sin (ωt + φ)

no
q 
qm  m – L ω2  sin( ωt + φ ) = vm sin ωt
 C 
vm 1
qm = , φ = 0; – ω2 L > 0
1 C
– L ω2
C
143
vm 1
vR = , φ = π L ω2 – >0
1 C
Lw 2 –
C
dq2
i2 = = ωqm cos(ωt + φ )
dt
i1 and i2 are out of phase. Let us assume

1
– ω2L > 0
d
C
he
vm sin ωt vm
i1 + i 2 = + cos ωt
R 1
Lω –
cω
pu T
is
Now A sin ωt + B cos ωt = C sin (ωt + φ )
re ER
C cos φ = A, C sin φ = B; C = A2 + B2
bl v 2
Therefore, i1 + i 2 =  m2 +
R
vm 2 2
2
[ωl – 1/ ωC ] 
1
sin(ωt + φ )
be C
R
φ = tan –1
o N
X L – XC
1/ 2
1 1 1 
tt ©
= + 
Z  R 2 ( L ω – 1/ ωC )2 
di qi di d 1 2
7.30 Li + Ri 2 + = vi ; Li =  Li  = rate of change of energy stored
dt c dt dt  2 
in an inductor.
Ri2 = joule heating loss
q d  q2 
i = = rate of change of energy stored in the capacitor.
C dt  2C 
no
vi = rate at which driving force pours in energy. It goes into (i) ohmic
loss and (ii) increase of stored energy.
T T T
d  1 2 q2 
∫ dt  + ∫ Ri dt = ∫ vidt
2
dt  2
i +
0 C  0 0
144
Answers
T
0 + ( +ve ) = ∫ vidt
0
∫ vidt > 0 if phase difference, a constant is acute.

0
d 2q dq q
d
7.31 (i) L 2
+R + = vm sin ωt
dt dt C
he
Let q = qm sin (ω t + φ) = – qm cos (ωt + φ )
i = imsin (ω t + φ ) = qm ω sin (wt + φ )
pu T
is
X – XL 
;φ = tan –1  C
vm vm
re ER
im = = 
Z 2 2
R + (X C – X L )  R 
bl 
(ii) U L = 1 Li 2 = 1 L 
vm
2 

2
sin2 (ωt 0 + φ )
be C
2
2 2  R + X C – X L ) 0 
o N
2
1 q2 1  vm  1 2
UC = =   2 cos (ωt 0 + φ )
2C 2C  R + ( X C – X L )2
2
 ω
(iii) Left to itself, it is an LC oscillator. The capacitor will go on
tt ©
discharging and all energy will go to L and back and forth.
Chapter 8
8.1 (c)
8.2 (b)
8.3 (b)
8.4 (d)
8.5 (d)
no
8.6 (c)
8.7 (c)
8.8 (a), (d)
8.9 (a), (b), (c)
8.10 (b), (d)
145
8.11 (a), (c), (d)
8.12 (b), (d)
8.13 (a), (c), (d)
8.14 As electromagnetic waves are plane polarised, so the receiving

antenna should be parallel to electric/magnetic part of the wave.
8.15 Frequency of the microwave matches the resonant frequency of water

molecules.
d
dq
8.16 iC = i D = = –2π q 0ν sin 2πν t .
dt
he
8.17 On decreasing the frequency, reactance X c =
1 will increase which
ωC
pu T
will lead to decrease in conduction current. In this case iD = iC; hence
is
displacement current will decrease.
re ER
bl
1 B02 1 3 × 108 × (12 × 10 –8 )2
8.18 I av = c = × = 1.71W /m 2 .
2 µ0 2 1.26 × 10–6
be C
T=2p/w
8.19
o N
BZ t
tt ©
Ey
8.20 EM waves exert radiation pressure. Tails of comets are due to solar
solar radiation.
8.21 µ 0 2I D µ 1 µ d φE i
B= = 0 = 0 ε0
4 πr 4 πr 2 πr dt
µ0ε0 d
= (E πr 2 )
2πr dt
no
µ0ε 0r dE
= .
2 dt
8.22 (a) λ1 → Microwave, λ2 → UV
λ3 → X rays, λ4 → Infrared
(b) λ3 < λ2 < λ4 < λ1
146
Answers
(c) Microwave - Radar

UV - LASIK eye surgery
X-ray - Bone fracture identification (bone scanning)
Infrared - Optical communication.
T
1
cos2 (kx – ωt )dt as S = c 2ε0 ( E × B )
T ∫0
8.23 Sav = c 2ε 0 E 0 × B0
1 T
= c 2ε 0E 0 B 0 ×
T 2
d
he
 E  1  as c = E 0 
= c 2ε 0E 0  0  × 
 c  2  B 0 
pu T 1
ε 0E 02c
is
=
2
re ER
bl
E 02  1 
= as  c =
2 µ0c  µ 0ε 0 
be C
dV
8.24 iD = C
dt
o N
dV
1 × 10 –3 = 2 × 10 –6
dt
tt ©
dV 1
= × 103 = 5 × 10V / s
dt 2
Hence, applying a varying potential difference of 5 × 102 V/s would
produce a displacement current of desired value.
8.25 Pressure
Force F 1 ∆p ∆p
P = = = (F = = rate of change of momentum)
Area A A ∆t ∆t
1 U
no
= . ( ∆pc = ∆U = energy imparted by wave in time∆t )

A ∆tc
I U 
=  intensity I = 
c A ∆t 
8.26 Intensity is reduced to one fourth. Tis is beacause the light beam
spreads, as it propogates into a spherical region of area 4π r2, but LASER
does not spread and hence its intensity remains constant.
147
8.27 Electric field of an EM wave is an oscillating field and so is the electric

force caused by it on a charged particle. This electric force averaged
over an integral number of cycles is zero since its direction changes
every half cycle. Hence, electric field is not responsible for radiation
pressure.
λ eˆ s ˆ
8.28 E= j
2πε o a
µo i ˆ
d
B= i
2π a
he
µo λ v ˆ
= i
2π a
pu T 1  λ ˆjs ˆ µo λv ˆ 
is
S= ( E × B) =  j× i
µo µo  2πε oa 2π a 
re ER
=
bl
– λ 2v ˆ
4π 2ε 0a 2
k
Let the distance between the plates be d. Then the electric field
be C
8.29
Vo
E= sin(2πν t ) . The conduction current density is given by the Ohm’s
d
o N
law = E.
1 Vo V0
⇒ Jc = sin (2πν t ) = sin (2πν t )
tt ©
ρ d ρd
= J co sin 2πν t
V0
where J 0c = .
ρd
The displacement current density is given as
Jd = ε
∂E
dt
=ε
∂
dt { Vo
d }
sin(2π ν t )
no
ε 2πν Vo
= cos(2πν t )
d
2πνε V 0
= Jdo cos(2πν t ) , where Jd0 =
d
148
Answers
Jdo 2πνε V o ρ d
= . = 2πνερ = 2π × 80 ε oν × 0.25 = 4πε oν ×10
J co d Vo
10 ν 4
= 9
=
9 ×10 9
8.30 (i) Displacement curing density can be found from the relation
dE
be J D = ε 0
d
dt
he
∂
cos (2πν t). ln   k
s ˆ
= ε0 µ0 I0
∂t a 
pu T
is
1
I 0 2πν 2 ( – sin ( 2πν t ) ) ln   k
s ˆ
=
c2 a 
re ER
bl ν 
c 
2
a 
=   2π I 0 sin ( 2πν t ) ln   kˆ
s 
be C
2π
I 0 ln   sin ( 2πν t ) k
a ˆ
=
λ2 s
o N
(ii) I d = ∫ J D sdsdθ
tt ©
a
2π
ln   .sds sin ( 2πν t )
a
=
λ 2
I 0 2π ∫ s
s =0
2 a
2π  1 2 a 
=   I 0 ∫ ds l n  .sin ( 2πν t )
 λ  s =0
2 s
2 2 2
a 2  2π 
a
s  a 
=   I 0 ∫ d   ln   .sin ( 2πν t )
4  λ  s =0  a  s 
no
2 1
a 2  2π 
=–   I 0 ∫ ln ξ d ξ .sin ( 2πν t )
4  λ  0
2 2
 a   2π 
= +    I 0 sin 2πν t ( ∴ The integral has value –1)
2  λ 
149
(iii) The displacement current
2
 a 2π 
Id =  .  I 0 sin 2πν t = I 0 sin 2πν t
d
2 λ 
2
I 0d  a π 
=  .
I0  λ  x
d
2 3 4 1
8.31 (i) ∫ E.dl = ∫ E.dl + ∫ E.dl + ∫ E.dl + ∫ E.dl

Ñ E=Ex î 4 E 3
he
1 2 3 4
dl
2 3 4 1
h dl E E dl
= ∫ E.dl cos 90° + ∫ E.dl cos 0 + ∫ E.dl cos 90° + ∫ E.dl cos 180°
pu T 1 E 2
is
1 2 3 4
z1 dl z2 Z
re ER
= E 0h [sin (kz 2 – ωt ) – sin (kz1 – ωt )] (1)
B=B0 ˆj
(ii)
bl
For evaluating ∫ B.ds let us consider the rectangle
1234 to be made of strips of area ds = h dz each.
y
be C
Z2
x
∫ B .ds = ∫ Bds cos 0 = ∫ Bds = ∫ B 0sin (kz – ωt )hdz

o N
Z1
4 3
– Bo h
= [cos(kz 2 – ωt ) – cos(kz1 – ωt )] (2)
tt ©
k B h dl
–d φB 1 ds 2
(iii) ∫ E.dl =
Ñ dt
z1
dz
z2 z
B=By ˆj
Using the relations obtained in Equations (1) and (2) and
simplifiying, we get y
B oh
E 0h [sin (kz 2 – ωt ) – sin (kz1 – ωt )] = ω[sin (kz 2 – ωt ) – sin (kz1 – ωt )]
k
ω
no
E 0 = B0
k
E0
=c
B0
(iv) For evaluating ∫ B.dl , let us consider the loop 1234 in yz plane
Ñ
as shown in Fig.
150
Answers
2 3 4 1
x
∫ B.dl = ∫ B.dl + ∫ B.dl + ∫ B.dl + ∫ B.dl
Ñ
1 2 3 4
2 3 4 1
E=Ex î = ∫ B dl cos 0 + ∫ B dl cos 90° + ∫ B dl cos 180° + ∫ B dl cos 90°
1 2 3 4
= B0h [sin (kz1 – ωt ) – sin (kz 2 – ωt )] (3)

1 dl 4
z
d
B=By ˆj dl B
B B dl ∫
Now to evaluate φE = E.ds , let us consider the rectangle 1234 to
be made of strips of area hdz each.
he
2 B 3
dl
y
Z2
φE = ∫ E.ds = ∫ Eds cos 0 = ∫ Eds = ∫ E 0sin (kz1 – ωt )hdz
pu T Z1
is
re ER
– E 0h
= [cos(kz 2 – ωt ) – cos(kz1 – ωt )]
bl
k
d φE E hω
∴ = 0 [sin (kz1 – ωt ) – sin (kz 2 – ωt )]
x dt k
be C
(4)
 d φE  , I = conduction current
o N
E=Exî
In
∫ B.dl = µ0
Ñ  I + ε0
 dt


= 0 in vacuum.
tt ©
d φE
1 z1 dz z2 ∫ B.dl = µ ε 0
∴Ñ
0 dt
4 z
B=By ˆj h
ds dl Using relations obtained in Equations (3) and (4) and ssimplifying,
2 3
we get
y
ω
B0 = E 0 .µ ε 0
k 0
E0 ω 1
= But E0/B0 = c, and ω = ck
B0 k µ ε 0
0
no
1 1
or c.c = Therefore, c = .
µ ε0 µ0ε 0
0
151
1
8.32 (a) E - field contribution is uE = ε0E 2
2 +1
1 B2
B - field contribution is u B =
2 µ0 0 p 2p
1 1 B2
Total energy density u = u E + u B = ε 0E 2 + ( 1)
2 2 µ0
d
The values of E2 and B2 vary from point to point and from moment to
moment. Hence, the effective values of E2 and B2 are their time averages.
he
(E 2 ) av= E 02 [sin 2 (kz – ωt )]av
pu T
is
2 2
(B 2)av = (B 2)av = B 0 [sin (kz – ωt )]av
re ER
The graph of sin2θ and cos2θ are identical in shape but shifted by π/
bl
2, so the average values of sin2θ and Cos2θ are also equal over any
integral multiple of π.
and also sin2θ + cos2θ =1

be C
1
So by symmetry the average of sin2θ = average of cos2θ =
2
o N
1 2 1
∴ (E 2 )av = E 0 and ( B 2 )av = B02
2 2
tt ©
Substuting in Equation (1),
1 1 B02
u= ε 0E 2 + (2)
4 4 µ
E0 1 1 B 02 E 02 / c 2 E2 1
(b) We know = c and c = ∴ = = 0 µ ε 0 = ε 0E 02 .
B0 µ ε0 4 µ0 4 µ0 4µ0 0 4
0
1 1 1 1
Therefore, u av = ε 0E 02 + ε 0E 02 = ε 0E 02 ,and I av = u avc = ε 0E 02 .
4 4 2 2
no
Chapter 9
9.1 (a)
9.2 (d)
9.3 (c)
152
Answers
9.4 (b)
9.5 (c)
9.6 (c)
9.7 (b)
9.8 (b)
9.9 (b)
d
9.10 (d)
9.11 (a)
he
9.12 (a), (b), (c)
9.13 (d)
pu T
is
9.14 (a), (d)
re ER
9.15 (a), (b)
9.16
9.17
bl
(a), (b), (c)
As the refractive index for red is less than that for blue, parallel
beams of light incident on a lens will be bent more towards the axis
be C
for blue light compared to red. Thus the focal length for blue light
will be smaller than that for red.
o N
9.18 The near vision of an average person is 25cm. To view an object with
magnification 10,
D 25
tt ©
D
m = ⇒ f = = = 2.5 = 0.025m
f m 10
1
P = = 40 diopters.
0.025
9.19 No. The reversibility of the lens makes equation.
9.20 Let the apparent depth be O1 for the object seen from µ2 then
µ2 h
O1 =
no
µ1 3
If seen from µ 3 the apparent depth is O2.
µ3  h  µ3  h + µ2 h  h  µ3 + µ3 
O2 =  + O1  =  =  
µ2  3  µ2  3 µ1 3  3  µ2 µ1 
Seen from outside, the apparent height is
153
1 h  1  h h  µ3 µ 3  
O3 =  +O2  = µ  +  µ + µ 
µ3  3  3 3 3  2 1  h/3 m3
O3
h 1 1 1 
=  + +  m2
3  µ1 µ2 µ3  h/3 O2
9.21 At minimum deviation

h/3 m1
O1
d
( A + Dm ) 
sin  
µ=  2 O
he
sin  
A
2
pu T
∴Given Dm = A
is
re ER
A A
2 sin cos
sin A 2 2 = 2 cos A
bl
∴ µ= =
sin
A
sin
A 2
2 2
be C
A 3 A
∴ cos = or = 30° ∴ A = 60°
2 2 2
o N
9.22 Let the two ends of the object be at distance u 1= u – L/2 and
u2 = u + L/2, respectively, so that |u1–u2|= L. Let the image of the two
ends be formed at v1 and v 2, so that the image length would be
tt ©
1 1 1 fu
L ′ = v1 – v 2 . Since u + v = f or v = u – f the image of the two ends will
f (u – L /2 ) f (u + L /2 )
be at v1 = , v2 =
u – f – L /2 u – f + L /2
Hence
f 2L
L ′ =|v1 – v 2 |=
(u – f )2 × L2 / 4
Since the object is short and kept away from focus, we have
L2/4 << (u –f )2
Hence finally
no
f2
L′ = L.
(u – f )2
9.23 Refering to the Fig., AM is the direction of incidence ray before liquid
is filled. After liquid is filledm, BM is the direction of the incident ray.
Refracted ray in both cases is same as that along AM.
154
Answers
1 sin i sin i
= =
µ sin r sin α
a
a O a M a –R a +R
a sin i = and sin α = cos(90 – α ) =
d a d + (a – R )2
2
d + (a – R )2
2
a i
-a
90
A R C R B µ(a 2 – R 2 )
Substuting, we get d =
(a + R )2 – µ(a – R )2
d
he
50.0
9.24
0.5
O O¢
pu T
is
re ER
bl
If there was no cut then the object would have been at a height of
0.5 cm from the principal axis 00′.
Consider the image for this case.
1 1 1
be C
– =
v u f
1 1 1 1 1 1
o N
∴ = + = + =
v u f –50 25 50
∴ v = 50 cm.
v 50
Magnification is m = =– = –1.
tt ©
u 50
Thus the image would have been formed at 50 cm from the pole and
0.5 cm below the principal axis.
Hence with respect to the X axis passing through the edge of the cut
lens, the co-ordinates of the image are
(50 cm, –1 cm)
9.25 From the reversibility of u and v, as seen from the formula for lens,
1 1 1
= –
f v u
It is clear that there are two positions for which there shall be an image
no
on the screen.
Let the first position be when the lens is at O.
Given –u + v = D
⇒ u = –(D – v)
Placing it in the lens formula
1 1 1
+ =
D –v v f
155
v + D –v 1
⇒ =
(D – v )v f
⇒ v2 – Dv + Df = 0
D D 2 – 4 Df
⇒ v = ±
2 2
D D 2 – 4Df 
u = –(D – v) = –  ± 
d
u O v
2 2 
he
Thus, if the object distance is
D D 2 – 4 Df
– then the image is at
2 2
pu T
is
D D 2 – 4Df
+
re ER
2 2
bl
If the object distance is
D
2
+
D 2 – 4 Df
2
, then the image is at
be C
D D 2 – 4Df
– ..
2 2
o N
The distance between the poles for these two object distances is
D D 2 – 4Df  D D 2 – 4Df  = D 2 – 4Df

+ – – 
2 2 2 2 
tt ©
Let d = D 2 – 4Df
D d D d
If u = + then the image is at v = – .
2 2 2 2
D–d
∴ The magnification m1 =
D +d
D–d D +d
If u = then v =
2 2
no
2
D +d m2  D +d 
∴The magnification m2 = - Thus =  .
D–d m1  D – d 
9.26 Let d be the diameter of the disc. The spot shall be invisible if the
d
incident rays from the dot at O to the surface at are at the critical angle.
2
156
Answers
Let i be the angle of incidence.
1
Then sin i =
µ
d /2
Now, = tan i
h
d –1
⇒ = h tan i = h  µ 2 – 1 
2
d
2h
∴d = .
he
µ2 – 1
9.27 (i) Let the power at the far point be Pf for the normal relaxed eye.
pu T
Then Pf =
1 1 1
= 60 D
is
= +
f 0.1 0.02
re ER
With the corrective lens the object distance at the far point is ∞. The
power required is
bl 1
P f′ = = +
1
f ′ ∞ 0.02
1
= 50 D
The effective power of the relaxed eye with glasses is the sum of the eye
be C
and that of the glasses Pg.

∴ P f′ = Pf + Pg
o N
∴ Pg = – 10 D.
(ii) His power of accomadation is 4 diopters for the normal eye. Let the
power of the normal eye for near vision be Pn.
Then 4 = Pn – Pf or Pn = 64 D.
tt ©
Let his near point be xn, then
1 1 1
+ = 64 or + 50 = 64
x n 0.02 xn
1
= 14,
xn
1
∴ xn = ; 0.07m
14
no
(iii) With glasses Pn′ = P f′ + 4 = 54
1 1 1
54 = + = + 50
x n′ 0.02 x n′
1
= 4,
x n′
1
∴ x′n = = 0.25m .
4
157
9.28 Any ray entering at an angle i shall be guided along AC if the angle
the ray makes with the face AC ( φ ) is greater than the critical angle.
1 A C
⇒ sin ≥
µ f
1 r
⇒ cos r ≥ i
µ
d
1
Or, 1 – cos2r ≤ 1 – B D
µ2
he
1
i.e. sin2r ≤ 1 –
µ2
pu T
Since sin i = µ sin r
is
1 1
sin2i ≤ 1 – 2
re ER
µ2 µ
bl
Or, sin2i ≤ µ2 – 1
π
The smallest angle φ shall be when i = . If that is greater than the
2
critical angle then all other angles of incidence shall be more than the
be C
critical angle.
Thus 1 ≤ µ2 –1
Or, µ2 ≥ 2
o N
⇒µ≥ 2
9.29 Consider a portion of a ray between x and x + dx inside the liquid. Let
tt ©
the angle of incidence at x be θ and let it enter the thin column at height
y. Because of the bending it shall emerge at x + dx with an angle θ + dθ
and at a height y + dy. From Snell’s law
µ(y) sin θ = µ(y+dy) sin (θ+dθ)
 dµ 
or µ(y) sinθ ;  µ (y ) + dy  (sinθ cosdθ + cosθ sin dθ )
 dy 
dµ
; µ (y ) sin θ + µ (y )cos θ dθ + dy sin θ
dy y q
dy
q + dq
–d µ
no
or µ(y) cosθdθ ; dy sin θ (y + dy)

dy
–1 d µ
dθ ; dy tan θ
µ dy
dx
dx
But tanθ = (from the fig.)
dy
158
Answers
–1 d µ
∴ dθ = dx
µ dy
d
–1 d µ –1 d µ
∴θ= dx =
µ dy ∫o
d
µ dy
9.30 Consider two planes at r and r + dr. Let the light be incident at an
angle θ at the plane at r and leave r + dr at an angle θ +dθ
Then from Snell’s law
d
n(r) sinθ = n(r + dr) sin (θ + dθ )
he
 dn 
⇒ n(r) sinθ ;  n (r ) + dr  (sinθ cos dθ + cosθ sin dθ )
 dr 
q + dq
pu T ;  n (r ) +
dn 
dr  (sinθ + cosθ dθ )
is
 dr 
re ER
Neglecting products of differentials
bl n (r )sinθ ; n (r )sinθ +
dn
dr
dr sinθ + n(r) cosθdθ
be C
dr R ⇒ – dn tan θ = n(r ) dθ
q r M dr dr
o N
2GM  2GM  dθ dθ
⇒ tan θ = 1 +  ≈
r 2c 2  rc 2  dr dr
r + dr r θo ∞
2GM tan θ dr
tt ©
∴ ∫ dθ = c 2 –∫∞ r 2
0
R
Now r2 = x2 +R2 and tanθ =
x
2rdr = 2xdx
θo ∞
2GM R xdx
∫ dθ = c 2 –∫∞ x 3
0
( x 2 + R 2 )2
Put x = R tan φ
no
dx = R Sec2 φ d φ
π /2
2GMR R sec2 φ d φ
∴ θ0 =
c2 ∫ R 3 sec3 φ
–π / 2
π /2
=
2 GM 4GM
∫ cos φ d φ =
Rc 2 –π / 2
R c2
159
9.31 As the material is of refractive index –1, θr is negative and θr′ positive.
Now θi = θr = θr′
The total deviation of the outcoming ray from the incoming ray is 4θi.
Rays shall not reach the receiving plate if
π 3π
≤ 4θi ≤ (angles measured clockwise from the y axis)
2 2
d
π 3π
≤ θi ≤ y Receiving plate
8 8
he
x
Now sin θi =
R
o qi
π
pu T
x 3π
R
is
–1
≤ sin ≤ qr
¢
qr ¢
x
8 R 8
re ER
qi
π x 3π
bl
Or, ≤ ≤
8 R 8 x
Rπ R 3π
Thus for ≤x ≤ light emitted from the source shall not reach
8 8
be C
the receiving plate.
9.32 (i) The time required to travel from S to P1 is

o N
SP1 u 2 + b2 u 1 b2 
t1 = = ; 1+  assuming b << u0
c c c 2 u2 
tt ©
The time required to travel from P1 to O is
P1O v2 + b2 v 1 b2 
t2 = = ;  1+ 
c c c 2 v2 
The time required to travel through the lens is
(n – 1)w(b ) where n is the refractive index.
tl =
c
Thus the total time is
1 1  1 1  1 1 1 P1
t= u + v + b 2  +  + (n – 1)w(b ) . Put = +
c  2 u v   D u v
b
no
1 1b 2
b  2 S u v O
Then t = u + v + + (n – 1)  w 0 + 
c 2 D  α 
Fermet’s principle gives
dt b 2(n – 1)b
=0= –
db CD cα
α = 2(n – 1)D
160
Answers
Thus a convergent lens is formed if α = 2(n – 1)D . This is independant

of b and hence all paraxial rays from S will converge at O (i.e. for rays
b << n and b << v).
Since 1 = 1 + 1 , the focal length is D.

D u v
(ii) In this case

1 1 b2 k 
t = c u + v + + (n − 1) k1ln  2  
 2 D  b 
d
dt b k
=0= – (n – 1) 1
he
db D b
⇒ b = (n – 1) k1D
2
∴b= (n – 1)k1D
pu T
is
Thus all rays passing at a height b shall contribute to the image. The ray
paths make an angle
re ER
b (n – 1)k1D (n – 1)k1uv (n – 1)k1u
bl
β; = 2
= 2
= .
v v v (u + v ) (u + v )v
Chapter 10
be C
10.1 (c)
o N
10.2 (a)
10.3 (a)
tt ©
10.4 (c)
10.5 (d)
10.6 (a), (b), (d)
10.7 (b), (d)
10.8 (a), (b)
10.9 (a), (b)
10.10 Yes.
no
10.11 Spherical.
10.12 Spherical with huge radius as compared to the earth’s radius so

that it is almost a plane.
10.13 Sound wave have frequencies 20 Hz to 20 kHz. The corresponding

wavelengths are 15m and 15mm, respectively. Diffraction effects
are seen if there are slits of width a such that.
α : λ.
161
For light waves, wavelengths 10–7m. Thus diffraction effects will

show when
a : 10 –7 m.
whereas for sound they will show for
15mm < a < 15m .
2.54
10.14 The linear distance between two dots is l = cm ; 0.84 × 10 –2 cm.
300
At a distance of Z cm this subtends an angle.
d
l 0.84 × 10–2 cm
φ : l /z ∴ z = = : 14.5 cm .
φ 5.8 × 10–4
he
10.15 Only in the special cases when the pass axis of (III) is parollel to (I) or
(II) there shall be no light emerging. In all other cases there shall be
light emerging because the pass axis of (II) is no longer perpendicular
pu T
is
to the pass axis of (III).
re ER
10.16 Polarisation by reflection occurs when the angle of incidence is the
bl
n2
Brewster’s angle i.e. tan θ B = where n2 < n1.
n1
n2
When light travels in such a medium the critical angle is sin θc =
be C
n1
where n2 < n1.
As |tan θB|>|sin θc|for large angles, θ B < θ C .
o N
Thus, polarisation by reflection shall definitely occur.
1.22λ
tt ©
10.17 d min =
2 sin β
where β is the angle subtended by the objective at the object.
o
For light of 5500 A
1.22 × 5.5 × 10–7

d min = m
2 sin β
For electrons accelerated through 100V the deBroglie wavelength

is
no
h 1.227
λ= = = 0.13nm = 0.13 × 10 –9 m
p 100
1.22 × 1.3 × 10–10

∴ d 'min =
2 sin β
162
Answers
1.22 × 1.3 × 10–10

∴ d 'min =
2 sin β
d 'min 1.3 × 10 –10

= : 0.2 × 10 –3
d min 5.5 × 10 –7
10.18 T2P = D + x, T1 P = D – x
S1P = (S1 T1 )2 + (PT1 )2
d
= [D 2 + (D – x)2]1/2
he
S2P = [D 2 + (D + x)2]1/2
Minima will occur when
pu T
is
λ
re ER
[D 2 + (D + x)2]1/2 – [D2 + (D – x)2]1/2 =
2
bl
If x = D
(D2 + 4D2)1/2 =
λ
be C
2
o N
λ λ
(5D2)1/2 = , ∴D = .
2 2 5
10.19 Without P:
tt ©
A = A ⊥ + A11
A ⊥ = A1⊥ + A 2⊥ = A 0⊥sin(kx –ωt )+A 0⊥sin(kx – ωt + φ )
(1) (2)
A 11 = A 11 + A 11
0
A 11 = A 11[sin(kx – wt ) + sin(kx – ωt + φ ]
where A 0⊥ , A 11
0
are the amplitudes of either of the beam in ⊥ and
11 polarizations.
no
∴ Intensity =
{ 2
= A 0⊥ + A 11
0 2
}[sin 2
(kx – wt ) (1+cos2φ + 2 sin φ )+sin 2 (kx –ωt ) sin2φ ] average
{ 2
= A 0⊥ + A11
0 2
}  12  .2(1+cosφ )
163
2
= 2 A 0⊥ .(1 + cos φ )since A 0⊥ average
0
= A 11 average
With P:
Assume A 2⊥ is blocked:
Intensity = (A 111 + A11

2 2
) + ( A1⊥ )2
d
2 2
= A ⊥0 (1 + cos φ ) + A ⊥0 .
2
he
2
Given: I0 = 4 A 0⊥ = Intensity without polariser at principal maxima.
Intensity at principal maxima with polariser
pu T
is
1
= A ⊥0  2 + 
2
re ER
 2
bl=
5
8
I0
be C
Intensity at first minima with polariser

o N
2
0 2
A 0⊥
= A ⊥
(1 – 1) +
2
tt ©
I0
= .
8
10.20 Path difference = 2d sinθ + ( µ – 1)l
∴ For principal maxima,
2d sinθ + 0.5l = 0
–l –1  d
sinθ 0 = = Ql = 
4d 16  4
no
D
∴ OP = D tan θ0 ≈ –
16
For the first minima:
λ
∴ 2d sinθ1 +0.5l = ±
2
164
Answers
±λ /2 – 0.5 l ±λ /2 – λ /8 1 1
sinθ1 = = =± –
2d 2λ 4 16
3
On the positive side: sinθ =
+
16
– 5
On the negative side: sinθ = –
16
d
The first principal maxima on the positive side is at distance
he
sinθ + 3
D tan θ + = D =D above O.
2
1 – sin θ 16 – 32
2
pu T 5
is
–
In the –ve side, the distance will be D tan θ = below O.
16 – 52
2
re ER
bl
10.21 (i) Consider the disturbances at R1 which is a distance d from A. Let
the wave at R1 because of A be YA = a cos ωt. The path difference of
the signal from A with that from B is λ/2 and hence the phase
be C
difference is π.
Thus the wave at R1 because of B is

o N
y B = a cos(ωt – π ) = – a cos ωt .
R2 The path difference of the signal from C with that from A is λ and
tt ©
hence the phase difference is 2π.
Thus the wave at R1 because of C is yc = a cos ωt.
The path difference between the signal from D with that of A is
2
d 2 +   − (d − λ /2 )
λ
l/2 l/2 2
R1 A B C
1/ 2
 λ  λ
= d 1 +  −d +
l/2  4d 2  2
no
D 1/ 2

= d 1 +
λ2  −d +
λ
 2
 8d 2 
λ
If d >>λ the path difference : and hence the phase difference
2
is π.
165
∴ y D = −a cos ωt .
Thus, the signal picked up at R1 is
yA + yB + yC + yD = 0
Let the signal picked up at R2 from B be yB = a1 cos ω t.

The path difference between signal at D and that at B is λ/2.
∴ y D = – a1 cos ωt
d
he
The path difference between signal at A and that at B is
2 1/ 2
λ  λ2  1 λ2
(d )2 +   − d = d 1 +
pu T 2 

4d 2 
−d :
8 d2
is
re ER
2π λ 2 πλ
bl
∴ The phase difference is . 2 = = φ : 0.
8λ d 4d
Hence, yA = a1 cos (ω t-φ)

be C
Similarly, yC = a1 cos (ω t-φ)

∴ Signal picked up by R2 is
yA + yB + yC + yD = y = 2a1 cos (ω t-φ)
o N
∴| y |2 = 4a12 cos2 (ωt – φ )
∴ I = 2a12
Thus R1 picks up the larger signal.
tt ©
(ii) If B is switched off,

R1 picks up y = a cos ω t
1 2
∴ I R1 = a
2
1 2
∴ I R2 = a1
2
Thus R1 and R2 pick up the same signal.
(c) If D is switched off.
no
1 2
∴ I R1 = a
2
R2 picks up y = 3a cos ω t
1
∴ I R2 = 9a 2
2
Thus R2 picks up larger signal compared to R1.
(iv) Thus a signal at R1 indicates B has been switched off and an
enhanced signal at R2 indicates D has been switched off.
166
Answers
10.22 (i) Suppose the postulate is true, then two parallel rays would
proceed as shown in Fig. 1. Assuming ED shows a wave front
then all points on this must have the same phase. All points
with the same optical path length must have the same phase.
qi qi
Thus – εr µr AE = BC – ε r µr CD
B air
or BC = εr µr (CD − AE )
E A C medium
D BC > 0, CD > AE
qr qi As showing that the postulate is reasonable. If however, the light
proceeded in the sense it does for ordinary material (viz. in the
d
Fig.1 fourth quadrant, Fig. 2)
he
Then – εr µr AE = BC – ε r µr CD
B or, BC = εr µr (CD − AE )
A C air
pu T As AE > CD, BC < O
is
medium showing that this is not possible. Hence the postalate is correct.
D
(ii) From Fig. 1.
re ER
E
BC = AC sin θi and CD-AE = AC sin θr:
bl
Fig. 2 Since − ε r µr ( AE − CD ) = BC
–n sin θr = sin θi.
10.23 Consider a ray incident at an angle i. A part of this ray is reflected
be C
from the air-film interface and a part refracted inside. This is partly
reflected at the film-glass interface and a part transmitted. A part of
the reflected ray is reflected at the film-air interface and a part
o N
transmitted as r2 parallel to r1. Of course succesive reflections and

transmissions will keep on decreasing the amplitude of the wave. Hence
rays r1 and r2 shall dominate the behavior. If incident light is to be
transmitted through the lens, r1 and r2 should interfere destructively.
tt ©
Both the reflections at A and D are from lower to higher refractive

index and hence there is no phase change on reflection. The optical
path difference between r2 and r1 is
n (AD + CD) – AB.
If d is the thickness of the film, then
d
AD = CD =
cos r
AB = AC sin i
no
AC
= d tan r
2
∴ AC = 2d tan r
Hence, AB = 2d tanr sini
Thus the optical path difference is
167
d
2n − 2d tan r sin i
cos r
r1
r2
sin i d sin r
= 2. − 2d sin i i
sin r cos r cos r B
i
Air n =1 C
A r
 1 − sin2 r  Film n = 1.38
= 2d sin   D
 sin r cos r  Glass n = 1.5
d
= 2nd cosr
he
For these waves to interefere destructively this must be λ/2.
λ
⇒ 2nd cos r =
pu T 2
is
or nd cos r = λ/4
re ER
i r
bl
For a camera lens, the sources are in the vertical plane and hence
0
be C
λ
∴ nd ; .
4
o N
o
5500 A o
⇒d = ; 1000 A
1.38 × 4
tt ©
Chapter 11
11.1 (d)
11.2 (b)
11.3 (d)
11.4 (c)
11.5 (b)
11.6 (a)
no
11.7 (a)
11.8 (c)
11.9 (c), (d)
11.10 (a), (c)
11.11 (b), (c)
168
Answers
11.12 (a), (b), (c)
11.13 (b), (d)
2m α Eα
11.14 λp / λd = p x / p p = = 8 :1
2m p E p
11.15 (i) Emax = 2hν – φ
(ii) The probability of absorbing 2 photons by the same electron is
d
very low. Hence such emissions will be negligible.
11.16 In the first case energy given out is less than the energy supplied. In
he
the second case, the material has to supply the energy as the emitted
photon has more energy. This cannot happen for stable substances.
11.17
pu T
No, most electrons get scattered into the metal. Only a few come out of
is
the surface of the metal.
re ER
11.18 Total E is constant
bl
Let n1 and n2 be the number of photons of X-rays and visible region
n1E1 = n2E2
be C
hc hc
n1 = n2
λ1 λ2
o N
n1 λ
= 1.
n 2 λ2
n1 1
= .
tt ©
n 2 500
11.19 The momentum is transferred to the metal. At the microscopic level,

atoms absorb the photon and its momentum is transferred mainly
to the nucleus and electrons. The excited electron is emitted.
Conservation of momentum needs to be accounted for the
momentum transferred to the nucleus and electrons.
11.20 Maximum energy = hν – φ
 1230  1  1230 
 –φ =  –φ
 600  2  400 
no
1230
φ= = 1.02eV.
1200
11.21 ∆x ∆p ; h
h 1.05 × 10 –34 Js
∆p ; ; = 1.05 × 10 –25
∆x 10 –9 m
169
p2 (1.05 × 10 –25 )2 1.052 –19 1.052

E = = = × 10 J= eV
2m 2 × 9.1 × 10 –31 18.2 18.2 × 1.6
= 3.8 × 10–2eV
11.22 I = nAnA = nBνB
nA ν
=2= B
nB νA
d
The frequency of beam B is twice that of A.
he
h h h h
11.23 pc = p A + p B = + = = if pA, pB > 0 or pA, pB < 0
λA λB λc λc
λA λB
or λc =
pu T
is
λ A + λB
re ER
If pA > 0, pB < 0 or pA < 0, pB > 0
bl
λB – λA h
pc = h =
λA .λB λc
λB .λA
λc = .
be C
λA – λB
11.24 2d sinθ = λ = d =10–10 m.

o N
h 6.6 × 10 –34
p= –10
= = 6.6 × 10 –21 kg m / s
10 10 –10
tt ©
(6.6 × 10 –24 )2 6.6 2

E = –27
× 1.6 × 10 –19 = × 1.6 × 10 –2 eV
2 × (1.7 × 10 ) 2 × 1.7
= 20.5 × 10–2eV = 0.21eV
11.25 6 × 1026 Na atoms weighs 23 kg.
Volume of target = (10–4 × 10–3 ) = 10–7m3
Density of sodium = (d) = 0.97 kg/m3
23
m 3 = 23.7 m3
no
Volume of 6 × 1026 Na atoms =

0.97
23
Volume occupied of 1 Na atom = m 3 = 3.95 × 10–26 m3
0.97 × 6 × 1026
10 –7
No. of sodium atoms in the target = = 2.53 × 1018
3.95 × 10 –26
Number of photons/s in the beam for 10–4 m2 = n
170
Answers
Energy per s nhν = 10–4 J × 100 = 10–2 W
1234.5
hν (for λ = 660nm) =
600
= 2.05eV = 2.05 × 1.6 × 10–19 = 3.28 × 10–19J.
10 –2
n= = 3.05 × 1016 / s
3.28 × 10 –19
d
1
n= ×1017 = 3.1 ×1016
3.2
he
If P is the probability of emission per atom, per photon, the number
of photoelectrons emitted/second
pu T
= P × 3.1 × 1016 × 2.53 × 1018
is
re ER
Current = P × 3.1 × 10+16 × 2.53 × 1018 × 1.6 × 10–19 A
bl = P × 1.25 × 10+16 A
This must equal 100µA or

be C
100 ×10 –6
P=
1.25 × 10+16
o N
∴ P = 8 × 10–21
Thus the probability of photemission by a single photon on a single

atom is very much less than 1. (That is why absorption of two
tt ©
photons by an atom is negligible).
1 q2 1 q2
∞
1
4 d∫ x 2
11.26 Work done by an external agency = + . dx = .
4πε 0 4 4πε 0d
(1.6 × 10 –19 ) × 9 × 109

With d = 0.1nm, energy = eV
4(10–10 ) × 1.6 × 10–19
1.6 × 9
= eV = 3.6 eV
4
no
11.27 (i) Stopping potential = 0 at a higher frequency for B. Hence it has

a higher work function.
h 2
(ii) Slope = = for A.
e (10 – 5) × 1014
2.5
= for B.
(15 – 10) × 1014
171
1.6 × 10 –19
h= × 2 × 10 –14 = 6.04 × 10 –34 Js for A
5
1.6 × 10 –19 × 2.5 × 10 –14

= = 8 × 10–34 Js for B.
5
Since h works out differently, experiment is not consistent with

the theory.
11.28 mAv = mAv1 + mBv2
d
1 1 1
he
m Av 2 = m Av12 + m B v22
2 2 2
1/ 1/
2/
pu T
∴ m A (v – v1 )(v A + v1 ) = m Bv B2
2/
is
re ER
∴ v + v1 = v2
bl
or v = v2 – v1
 m – mB 
∴ v1 =  A  v, and
 2m A 
v2 =  v
be C
 mA + mB   mA + mB 
h
o N
∴ λinitial =
m Av
h h (m A + m B )
tt ©
λfinal = =
m Av m A (m A – m B )v
h  mA +mB) 
∴ ∆λ =  – 1
m Av  m A – m B 
dN P
11.29 (i) = = 5 × 1019 / sec
dt (hc / λ )
no
hc
(ii) = 2.49eV > W0 : Yes. d
λ
r
πr 2
(iii) P . ∆t = W0 , ∆t = 28.4s
4π d 2
2
 dN  πr
(iv) N =  × 2
× ∆t = 2
 dt  4π d
172
Answers
Chapter 12
12.1 (c)
12.2 (c)
12.3 (a)
12.4 (a)
12.5 (a)
d
12.6 (a)
he
12.7 (a)
12.8 (a), (c)
pu T
(a), (b)
is
12.9
re ER
12.10 (a), (b)
12.11
12.12
bl
(b), (d)
(b), (d)
(c), (d)
be C
12.13
12.14 Einstein’s mass-energy equivalence gives E = mc2. Thus the mass

o N
B
of a H-atom is m p + m e − where B ≈ 13.6eV is the binding energy.
c2
12.15 Because both the nuclei are very heavy as compared to electron
tt ©
mass.
12.16 Because electrons interact only electromagnetically.
12.17 Yes, since the Bohr formula involves only the product of the charges.
13.6
12.18 No, because accoding to Bohr model, En = – ,
n2
and electons having different energies belong to different levels

having different values of n. So, their angular momenta will be
nh
.
no
different, as mvr =
2π
me 4
12.19 The ‘m’ that occurs in the Bohr formula En = – is the
8ε 0n 2h 2
reduced mass. For H-atom m ≈ me. For positronium m ≈ m e / 2 .
Hence for a positonium E1≈ – 6.8eV.
173
12.20 For a nucleus with charge 2e and electrons of charge –e, the levels
4me 4
are E n = – . The ground state will have two electrons each
8ε 0 2n 2h 2
of energy E, and the total ground state energy would by –(4×13.6)eV.
12.21 v = velocity of electron
a0= Bohr radius.
2π a 0
d
∴Number of revolutions per unit time =
v
he
2π a 0
∴ Current = e.
v
pu T
is
 1 1 
12.22 νmn = cRZ 2  2
− 2 ,
( ) n
re ER
n + p 
bl
where m = n + p, (p = 1, 2, 3, ...) and R is Rydberg constant.
For p << n.
be C
–2
1  p 1 
ν mn = cRZ 2  2 1 +  − 2
n  n n 
o N
1 2p 1 
ν mn = cRZ 2  – −
 n 2 n 3 n 2 
tt ©
2 p  2cRZ 2 
ν mn = cRZ 2 ;  p
n3  n3 
Thus, νmn are approximately in the order 1, 2, 3...........
12.23 H γ in Balmer series corresponds to transition n = 5 to n = 2. So the

electron in ground state n = 1 must first be put in state n = 5.
Energy required = E1 – E5 = 13.6 – 0.54 = 13.06 eV.
If angular momentum is conserved, angular momentum of photon

= change in angular momentum of electron
no
= L 5 – L 2 = 5h – 2h = 3h = 3 × 1.06 × 10 –34
= 3.18 × 10–34 kg m2/s.
Reduced mass for H = µH =

me  m 
12.24 ; m e 1 – e 
me  M 
1+
M
174
Answers
 m   m  m 
Reduced mass for D = µ D ; m e 1 – e  = m e 1 – e 1 + e 
 2M   2M  2M 
1
hν ij = ( E i – E j )α µ . Thus, λij α
µ
If for Hydrogen/Deuterium the wavelength is λH / λD
–1
λD µH  m   1 
d
= ; 1 + e  ; 1 – 
λ H µD  2M   2 × 1840 
he
λD = λH × (0.99973)
pu T
Thus lines are 1217.7 Å , 1027.7 Å, 974.04 Å, 951.143 Å.
is
12.25 Taking into account the nuclear motion, the stationary state
re ER
µ Z 2e 4  1 
energies shall be, E n = –  . Let µH be the reduced mass
bl

8ε 02h 2  n 2 
of Hydrogen and µD that of Deutrium. Then the frequency of the

µH e 4  1  3 µH e
4
be C
1st Lyman line in Hydrogen is hν H = 1 –  = . Thus

8ε 02h 2  2 2
4  4 8ε 0 h
o N
3 µH e 4
the wavelength of the transition is λH = . The wavelength
4 8ε 02h 3c
3 µD e 4
of the transition for the same line in Deutrium is λD = .
tt ©
4 8ε 02h 3c
∴ ∆λ = λD – λH
Hence the percentage difference is
∆λ λD – λH µ – µH
100 × = × 100 = D × 100
λH λH µH
meMD meMH
–
(m e + M D ) (m e + M H )
no
= × 100
m e M H /(m e + M H )
 m + M H  MD 
=  e  – 1 × 100
 m e + M D  MH 
Since me << MH < MD
175
∆λ M M 1 + me / M H  
× 100 =  H × D  1 + m / M  – 1 × 100
λH M
 D M H  e D  
= (1 + m e / M H )(1 + m e / M D )–1 – 1 × 100
 m m 
; (1 + e – e – 1 × 100
 M H M D 
d
 1 1 
≈ me  –  × 100
he
MH MD 
 1 1 
= 9.1 × 10 –31  – × 100
1.6725 × 10 –27 3.3374 × 10 –27 
pu T
is
= 9.1 × 10 –4 [0.5979 – 0.2996] × 100
re ER
bl
= 2.714 × 10–2 %
12.26 For a point nucleus in H-atom:
mv 2 e2
be C
1
Ground state: mvr = h , = – 2.
rB rB 4πε 0
o N
h2 1  e2  1
∴m 2 2
. = +  2
m rB rB  4πε 0  rB
tt ©
h2 4 πε0 °
∴ . 2 = rB = 0.51 A
m e
Potential energy
 e2  1 mv 2 1 h2 h
–  . = –27.2eV ; K .E = = m. 2 2 = = +13.6eV
 4 πr0  rB 2 2 m rB 2mrB2
For an spherical nucleus of radius R,
If R < rB, same result.

no
If R >> r B: the electron moves inside the sphere with radius

rB′ ( rB′ = new Bohr radius).
 r ′3 
Charge inside rB′ 4 = e  B3 
R 
176
Answers
h 2  4πε 0  R 3
∴ rB′ =  
m  e 2  rB′ 3
° °
r ′B4 = (0.51 A).R 3. R = 10 A
°
= 510( A)4
d
°
∴ rB′ ≈ (510)1/ 4 A < R.
he
1 m h h 1
K .E = mv 2 = . 2 2 = .
2 2 m rB′ 2m rB′ 2
pu T
is
re ER
 h 2   rB2  (0.51)2 3.54
= . 2  = (13.6eV)
2   1/ 2
= = 0.16eV
2 ′ (510) 22.6
bl
 mr r
B   B 
 e 2   rB′ 2 – 3R 2 
P .E = +  . 
 4πε 0   2R
3

be C
 e 2 1   rB (rB′ 2 – 3R 2 
o N
= + . . 
 4πε 0 rB   R3 
 0.51( 510 – 300) 

tt ©
= +(27.2eV)  
 1000 
–141
= +(27.2eV). = –3.83eV.
1000
12.27 As the nucleus is massive, recoil momentum of the atom may be

neglected and the entire energy of the transition may be considered
transferred to the Auger electron. As there is a single valence electron
in Cr, the energy states may be thought of as given by the Bohr model.
2 1
The energy of the nth state E n = – Z R where R is the Rydberg
no
n2
constant and Z = 24.
The energy released in a transition from 2 to 1

 1 3
is ∆E = Z 2R 1 –  = Z 2R. The energy required to eject a n = 4
 4 4
2 1
electron is E 4 = Z R .
16
177
Thus the kinetic energy of the Auger electron is
3 1  1 2
K .E = Z 2R  –  = Z R
 4 16  16
11
= × 24 × 24 × 13.6 eV
16
= 5385.6 eV
d
12.28 mpc2 = 10–6 × electron mass × c2
≈ 10 –6 × 0.5 MeV
he
≈ 10 –6 × 0.5 × 1.6 × 10 –13
pu T
is
≈ 0.8 × 10 –19 J
re ER
h hc 10 –34 × 3 × 108
bl
= 2
= ≈ 4 × 10 –7 m >> Bohr radius.
m pc m pc 0.8 × 10 –19
e2  1 λ
be C
F =
4πε 0  r 2 + r  exp(– λr )
o N
h
where λ –1 = ≈ 4 × 10 –7 m >> rB
m pc
tt ©
1
∴ λ << i .e λrB << 1
rB
e 2 exp(– λr )
U (r ) = – .
4πε 0 r
h
mvr = h ∴ v =
mr
mv 2  e2   1 λ 
Also : =≈   2 + 
no
r  4πε 0   r r
h2  e2   1 λ 
∴ 3
=  2 + 
mr  4πε 0   r r
h2  e2  2
∴ =  [r + λ r ]
m  4 πε 0 
178
Answers
h 4πε 0
If λ = 0;r = rB = .
m e2
h2 e2
= .rB
m 4πε 0
Since λ –1 >> rB , put r = rB + δ
d
∴ rB = rB + δ + λ (rB2 + δ 2 + 2δ rB ); negect δ 2
he
or 0 = λrB2 + δ (1 + 2 λrB )
pu T
δ =
– λ rB 2
≈ λ rB 2 (1 – 2λ rB ) = – λrB 2 since λrB << 1
is
1 + 2λ rB
re ER
bl
∴ V (r ) = –
e 2 exp(– λδ – λrB )
4πε 0
.
rB + δ
be C
e 2 1  δ  
∴ V (r ) = – 1 – r  .(1 – λrB )
4πε 0 rB  B  
o N
≅ (–27.2eV) remains unchanged.

tt ©
1 1 h2 h2 h2  2δ 
K .E = – mv 2 = m . 2 = = 2 
1–
2 2 mr 2(rB + δ )2
2rB  rB 
= (13.6eV) [1 + 2λrB ]
e2 h2
Total energy = – + [1 + 2λrB ]
4πε 0rB 2rB 2
= –27.2 + 13.6 [1 + 2λrB ] eV
Change in energy = 13.6 × 2λrB eV = 27.2λrB eV

no
12.29 Let ε = 2 + δ
q1q 2 R0δ Rδ qq
F = . 2 +δ = ∧ 2 +0δ , where 1 2 = ∧, ∧ = (1.6 ×10–19 )2 × 9 × 109
4πε 0 r r 4π 0ε
= 23.04 × 10 –29
179
mv 2
=
r
∧R 0δ
v2 =
m r 1+δ
1/ 2
(i) nh nh  m 
mvr = n h , r = = r 1/ 2 +δ / 2
mv m  ∧ R 0 
δ
d
1
he
 2 2 1– δ
Solving this for r, we get rn =  n h 
δ
 m ∧ R0 
pu T
For n = 1 and substituting the values of constant, we get
is
1
re ER
 h2 1– δ
r1 =  δ
bl
m ∧ R0 
1
 1.052 × 10 –68  2.9
be C
r1 =  –31 –28 +19 

= 8 × 10 –11 = 0.08 nm
 9.1 × 10 × 2.3 × 10 × 10 
(< 0.1 nm)
o N
1
nh  m ∧ R δ 1– δ h
(ii) vn = = n h  2 2 0  . For n = 1, v1 = = 1.44 × 106 m/s
mrn  n h  mr1
tt ©
1
(iii) K.E. = mv12 = 9.43 × 10 –19 J=5.9eV
2
∧
P.E. till R 0 = –
R0
r r
dr ∧R 0δ  1 
∫ r 2 +δ
δ
P.E. from R0 to r = + ∧ R0 =+
R0
–1 – δ  r 1+δ  R0
∧R0δ  1 1 
=– – 1+δ 
no
1 + δ  r
1+δ
R0 
∧  R 0δ 1 
=–  – 
1 + δ  r 1+δ R 0 
∧  R 0δ 1 1+ δ
P .E . = –  1+δ – + 
1 + δ r R0 R0 
180
Answers
∧  R 0–1.9 1.9 
P .E . = –  – 
–0.9  r –0.9 R0 
2.3
= × 10 –18[(0.8)0.9 – 1.9] J = – 17.3 eV
0.9
Total energy is (–17.3 + 5.9) = –11.4 eV.
d
Chapter 13
he
13.1 (c)
13.2
pu T
(b)
is
13.3 (b)
re ER
bl
13.4 (a)
13.5 (a)
13.6 (b)
be C
13.7 (b)
o N
13.8 (a), (b)
13.9 (b), (d)
13.10 (c), (d)

tt ©
13.11 No, the binding energy of H13 is greater.
dN
dt
N
13.12
no
13.13 B has shorter mean life as λ is greater for B.
13.14 Excited electron because energy of electronic energy levels is in the

range of eV, only not in MeV. as γ -radiation has energy in MeV.
181
13.15 2 γ photons are produced which move in opposite directions to

conserve momentum.
13.16 Protons are positively charged and repel one another electrically.
This repulsion becomes so great in nuclei with more than 10 protons
or so, that an excess of neutrons which produce only attractive
forces, is required for stability.
d
No. of atoms
he
13.17
B
pu T
is
re ER
time
bl
At t = 0, N A = N O while N B = 0. As time increases, N A falls off
exponentially, the number of atoms of B increases, becomes
maximum and finally decays to zero at ∞ (following exponential
be C
decay law).
o N
1 R0
13.18 t= ln
λ R
5760 16 5760 4
tt ©
= ln = ln
0.693 12 0.693 3
5760 4
= × 2.303 log = 2391.12 years.
0.693 3
13.19 To resolve two objects separated by distance d, the wavelength λ of
the proving signal must be less than d. Therefore, to detect separate
parts inside a nucleon, the electron must have a wavelength less
than 10–15 m.
h hc
λ= and K ≈ pc ⇒ K ≈ pc =
p λ
no
6.63 × 1034 × 3 × 108

= eV
1.6 × 10 –19 × 10 –15
= 109 eV. = 1 GeV.
23
13.20 (a) 11 Na : Z1 = 11, N1 = 12
23 23
∴ Mirror isobar of 11 Na = 12 Mg .
182
Answers
(b) Since Z2 > Z1, Mg has greater binding energy than Na.
38 38 38
13.21 S 
2.48 h
→ Cl 
0.62 h
→ Ar
At time t, Let 38
S have N1(t ) active nuclei and 38
Cl have N2(t) active
nuclei.
dN 1
= – λ1N 1 = rateof formation of Cl38. Also
dt
dN 2
d
= – λ1N 2 + λ1N 1
dt
he
But N1 = N 0e – λ1t
dN 2
= – λ1N 0e – λ1t –λ2N 2
dt
pu T
is
Multiplying by e λ 2 t d t and rearranging
re ER
e λ 2t dN 2 + λ2 N2e λ 2t dt =λ1N0e ( λ2 – λ1 )t dt
bl
Integrating both sides.
λ 2t N 0λ1 ( λ 2 – λ 1 )t
N 2e = e +C
λ2 – λ1
be C
Since at t = 0, N2 = 0, C=– N 0λ1

λ2 – λ1
o N
N 0 λ1 ( λ 2 – λ1 )t
∴ N 2e λ 2t = (e – 1)
λ2 – λ1
N 0 λ1
tt ©
N2 = (e – λ ,t – e – λ2t )
λ2 – λ1
dN 2
For maximum count, =0
dt
 λ1 
On solving, t =  ln /(λ 1– λ 2)
 λ 2 
2.48
= ln /(2.48 – 0.62)
0.62
ln 4 2.303 log 4
no
= =
1.86 1.86
= 0.745 s.
13.22 From conservation of energy
2
pn 2 p p
E − B = Kn + K p = + (1)
2m 2m
183
From conservation of momentum
E
pn + p p = (2)
c
If E = B, the first equation gives pn = pp = 0 and hence the second

equation cannot be satisfied, and the process cannot take place.
For the process to take place, Let E = B + λ, where λ would be <<B.
Then : substituting for pn from Equation (2) into Equation (1),
d
1 1
( 2
)
he
λ= ( p 2p + pn2 ) = p 2 + ( p p − E /c )
2m 2m p
2E  E2 
pu T
∴ 2 p p2 − p p +  2 − 2m λ  = 0
is
c c 
re ER
bl
 E2 
2E / c ± 4E 2 / c 2 − 8  2 − 2m λ 
c 
∴ pp =
4
be C
Since the determinant must be positive for pp to be real :
4E 2
o N
 E2 
2
– 8  2 − 2m λ  = 0
c c 
4E 2
tt ©
E2 B2
Or, 16m λ = 2 , ∴λ = ≈ .
c 4mc 2 4mc 2
me 4
13.23 The binding energy in H atom E = = 13.6 eV . (1)
8ε 02h 2
If proton and neutron had charge e ′ each and were governed by

the same electrostatic force, then in the above equation we would
need to replace electronic mass m by the reduced mass m ′ of
proton-neutron and the electronic charge e by e ′ .
no
M 1836m
m′ = = = 918m .
2 2
918m e ′
∴ Binding energy = = 2.2MeV (given) (2)
8ε 02h 2
Diving (2) by (1)
184
Answers
4
 e′  2.2MeV
918   =
e 13.6 eV
e′
⇒ ≈ 11 .
e
13.24 Before β decay, neutron is at rest. Hence En = mnc2, pn = 0
After β decay, from conservation of momentum:
d
he
pn = p p + p e
Or p p + pe = 0 ⇒ p p = pe = p
pu T
is
1
Also, E p = (m p 2c 4 + p p 2c 2 )2 ,
re ER
bl
1 1
E e = (m e 2c 4 + p e 2c 2 )2 = (m e 2c 4 + p p c 2 )2
From conservation of energy:

be C
1 1
(m p 2c 4 + p 2c 2 )2 + (m e 2c 4 + p 2c 2 )2 = m n c 2
o N
m pc 2 ≈ 936MeV,m n c 2 ≈ 938MeV,m e c 2 = 0.51MeV

tt ©
Since the energy difference between n and p is small, pc will be

small, pc << mpc2, while pc may be greater than mec2.
p 2c 2
⇒ m pc 2 + ; m n c 2 – pc
2m p 2c 4
2 2
To first order pc ; m n c – m pc = 938MeV – 936MeV = 2MeV
This gives the momentum.
Then,
no
1
E p = (m p 2c 4 + p 2c 2 )2 = 9362 + 22 ; 936MeV
1
E e = (m e 2c 4 + p 2c 2 )2 = (0.51)2 + 22 ; 2.06MeV
13.25 (i) t1/2 = 40 min (approx).
(ii) Slope of graph = –λ
185
–4.16+3.11 
So λ = –   = 1.05h
ln(R/R0)
 1  0 1 2 3 4
t(h)
0.693 –1.04
So t1/ 2 = = 0.66h = 39.6 min or 40 min(approx ).
1.05 –2.08
–3.11
13.26 (i) SpSn = (M119,70 + MH – M120,70)c2
–4.16
= (118.9058 + 1.0078252 – 119.902199)c2
d
= 0.0114362 c2
he
SpSb = (M120,70 + MH – M121,70)c2
= (119.902199 + 1.0078252 – 120.903822)c2
pu T
= 0.0059912 c2
is
re ER
Since SpSn > SpSb, Sn nucleus is more stable than Sb nucleus.
bl
(ii) It indicates shell structure of nucleus similar to the shell
structure of an atom. This also explains the peaks in BE/
nucleon curve.
be C
Chapter 14
o N
14.1 (d)
tt ©
14.2 (b)
14.3 (b)
14.4 (d)
14.5 (b)
14.6 (c)
14.7 (b)
14.8 (c)
no
14.9 (a), (c)
14.10 (a), (c)
14.11 (b), (c), (d)
14.12 (b), (c)
14.13 (a), (b), (d)
186
Answers
14.14 (b), (d)
14.15 (a), (c), (d)
14.16 (a), (d)
14.17 The size of dopant atoms should be such as not to distort the pure
semiconductor lattice structure and yet easily contribute a charge
carrier on forming co-valent bonds with Si or Ge.
14.18 The energy gap for Sn is 0 eV, for C is 5.4 eV, for Si is 1.1 eV and for
Ge is 0.7eV, related to their atomic size.
d
14.19 No, because the voltmeter must have a resistance very high
he
compared to the junction resistance, the latter being nearly infinite.
pu T
+1V
is
14.20
re ER
bl
0
14.21 (i) 10 × 20 × 30 × 10–3 = 6V

be C
(ii) If dc supply voltage is 5V, the output peak will not exceed Vcc = 5V.
Hence, V0 = 5V.
o N
14.22 No, the extra power required for amplified output is obtained from the
DC source.
14.23 (i) ZENER junction diode and solar cell.

tt ©
(ii) Zener breakdown voltage

(iii) Q- short circuit current
P- open circuit voltage.
14.24 Energy of incident light photon
6.6 × 10 –34 × 3 × 108

hv = = 2.06eV
6 × 10 –7 × 1.6 × 10 –19
For the incident radiation to be detected by the photodiode, energy

no
of incident radiation photon should be greater than the band gap.

This is true only for D2. Therefore, only D2 will detect this radiation.
14.25 V BB – V BE If R is increased, I will decrease. Since I = βI , it will

IB = . 1 B c b
R1
result in decrease in I C i.e decrease in ammeter and voltmeter
readings.
187
14.26
d
OR gate gives output according to the truth table.
he
A B C
0 0 0
pu T 0 1 1
is
re ER
1 0 1
bl
1 1 1
be C
14.27 V0
o N
tt ©
Input Output
A A
0 1
1 0
14.28 Elemental semiconductor’s band-gap is such that emissions are in

IR region.
14.29 Truth table

no
A B Y
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
AND Gate
188
Answers
P
14.30 I Z max = = 0.2A = 200 mA
VZ
Vs – V Z 2
RS = = = 10 Ω.
I Z max 0.2
14.31 I3 is zero as the diode in that branch is reverse bised. Resistance in

the branch AB and EF are each (125 + 25) Ω = 150 Ω .
d
As AB and EF are identical parallel branches, their effective
150
= 75Ω
he
resistance is
2
∴ Net resistance in the circuit = (75 + 25) Ω = 100 Ω .
pu T
is
5
∴ Current I1 = = 0.05A .
re ER
100
bl
As resistances of AB and EF are equal, and I1 = I2 + I3 + I4, I3 = 0
∴ I2 = I4 =
0.05
2
= 0.025A
be C
14.32 As Vbe = 0, potential drop across Rb is 10V.

o N
10
∴ Ib = = 25µ A
400 × 103
tt ©
Since Vce = 0, potential drop across Rc, i.e. IcRc is 10V.
10
∴ Ic = = 3.33 × 10 –3 = 3.33mA .
3 × 103
I c 3.33 × 10–3
∴β = = = 1.33 × 102 = 133.
Ib 25 × 10–6
14.33
A
0 2
1 3 4 5 t (s)
no
0 2
1 3 4 5
C1
0 2
1 3 4 5
C2
0 2
1 3 4 5
189
14.34 From the output characteristics at point Q, VCE = 8V & IC = 4mA

VCC = ICRC + VCE
VCC – VCE
Rc =
IC
16 – 8
Rc = = 2KΩ
4 × 10 –3
Since,
d
VBB = IBRB + VBE
he
16 – 0.7
RB = = 510KΩ
30 × 10 –6
pu T
is
IC 4 × 10 –3
= 133
re ER
Now, β = =
I B 30 × 10–6
bl
Voltage gain = AV = – β
RC
RB
be C
2 × 103
= –133 ×
510 × 103
o N
= 0.52
Power Gain = Ap = β × AV
tt ©
RC
= –β 2
RB
2 × 103 Voltage
= (133)2 × = 69
510 × 103
14.35 When input voltage is greater than 5V, diode 5V

is conducting
Time
When input is less than 5V, diode is open
no
circuit
14.36 (i) In ‘n’ region; number of e– is due to As:
ne = ND = 1 × 10–6 × 5 × 1028 atoms/m3
ne = 5 × 1022/m3
The minority carriers (hole) is
190
Answers
n i2 (1.5 × 1016 )2 2.25 × 1032

nh = = =
ne 5 × 1022 5 × 1022
nh = 0.45 × 10/m3
Similarly, when Boron is implanted a ‘p’ type is created with holes
nh = NA = 200 × 10–6 × 5 × 1028
= 1 × 1025/m3
d
This is far greater than e– that existed in ‘n’ type wafer on which
Boron was diffused.
he
Therefore, minority carriers in created ‘p’ region
n i2 2.25 × 1032
pu T
ne = =
is
nh 1 × 1025
re ER
= 2.25 × 107/m3
bl
(ii) Thus, when reverse biased 0.45 × 1010/m3, holes of ‘n’ region
would contribute more to the reverse saturation current than 2.25
× 107/m3 minority e– of p type region.
be C
A A AB
B
o N
14.37 B
A.B+A.B
B B.A
A
tt ©
14.38
1KW
no
B C
14.39 IC ≈ IE ∴ IC (RC + RE) + VCE =12 V
RE = 9 – RC = 1.2 KΩ
191
∴ VE = 1.2 V
VB = VE + VBE =1.7 V
VB
I = = 0.085 mA
20K
12–1.7 10.3
RB = = = 108 KΩ
I C / β + 0.085 0.01 + 1.085
14.40 IE = IC + IB IC = β IB (1)
d
ICRC + VCE + IERE = VCC (2)
RIB + VBE + IERE = VCC (3)
he
From (3) Ie ≈ IC = β IB
pu T VCC – V BE 11.5
is
(R + β RE)= VCC – VBE, I B = = mA
R + β RE 200
re ER
From (2)
RC +R E =
bl VCC – VCE VCC – VCE
IC
RC = 1.56 – 1 = 0.56KΩ
=
βIB
=
2
11.5
(12 – 3)KΩ = 1.56KΩ
be C
o N
Chapter 15
15.1 (b)
tt ©
15.2 (a)
15.3 (b)
15.4 (a)
15.5 (b)
15.6 (c)
15.7 (b)
15.8 (b)
no
15.9 (c)
15.10 (a), (b), (d)
15.11 (b), (d)
15.12 (b), (c), (d)
15.13 (a), (b), (c)
192
Answers
15.14 (b), (d)
15.15 (i) analog
(ii) analog
(iii) digital
(iv) digital
15.16 No, signals of frequency greater than 30 MHz will not be reflected
by the ionosphere, but will penetrate through the ionosphere.
d
The refractive index increases with increase in frequency which
he
15.17
implies that for higher frequency waves, angle of refraction is less,
i.e. bending is less. Hence, the condition of total internal relection
is atained after travelling larger distance (by 3MHz wave).
pu T
is
15.18 Ac + Am = 15, Ac – Am = 3
re ER
∴ 2Ac = 18, 2Am = 12
bl ∴ m =
Am 2
Ac
=
3
be C
1
15.19 = 1MHz
2π LC
o N
1
LC =
2π × 106
tt ©
15.20 In AM, the carrier waves instantaneous voltage is varied by

modulating waves voltage. On transmission, noise signals can also
be added and receiver assumes noise a part of the modulating
signal.
However in FM, the carriers frequency is changed as per modulating

waves instantaneous voltage. This can only be done at the mixing/
modulating stage and not while signal is transmitting in channel.
Hence, noise doesn’t effect FM signal.
15.21 Loss suffered in transmission path

no
= – 2 dB km–1 × 5 km = – 10 dB
Total amplifier gain = 10 dB + 20 dB
= 30 dB
Overall gain of signal = 30 dB – 10 dB
= 20 dB
193
P 
10 log  o  = 12 or Po = Pi × 102
 Pi 
= 1.01 mW × 100 = 101 mW.
15.22 (i) Range = 2 × 6.4 × 106 × 20 = 16 km
Area covered = 803.84 km2
(ii) Range = 2 × 6.4 × 106 × 20 + 2 × 6.4 × 106 × 25
d
= (16 + 17.9) km = 33.9 km
he
Area covered = 3608.52 km2
∴ Percentage increase in area
pu T
is
(3608.52 – 803.84)
× 100
re ER
=
803.84
15.23 bl
= 348.9%
dm2 = 2(R + h T )2
hT
dm
be C
8RhT = 2(R+hT)2 (Q dm = 2 2Rh T )

o N
R
2 2
4Rh T = R + h T + 2Rh T
(R – hT)2 = 0
tt ©
R = hT
Since space wave frequency is used, λ << hT, hence only tower height
is taken to consideration.
In three diamensions, 6 antenna towers of hT = R would do.
15.24 For F1 layer

2
5 6
5 × 106 = 9(Nmax)1/2 or Nmax =  × 10  = 3.086 × 1011 m–3
9 
For F2 layer
no
8 × 106 = 9 (Nmax)1/2 or
8 6 11 –3
Nmax =  × 10  = 7.9 × 10 m = 7.9 × 1011 m–3.
9 
15.25 Of ωc – ωm, ωc and ωm+ ωm, only ωc + ωm or ωc – ωm contains information.

Hence cost can be reduced by transmitting ωc + ωm, ωc – ωm, both ωc + ωm
& ωc – ωm
194
Answers
1 1
= , so ln   = –α x
I
15.26 (i)
Io 4 4
ln 4 
or ln4 = ax or x =  
 α 
I
(ii) 10log10 = –α x where α is the attunation in dB/km.
Io
Here I = 1
d
Io 2
he
1
or 10log   = –50α or log2 = 5α
2
pu T or α =
log 2 0.3010
= = 0.0602dB/ km
is
5 5
re ER
2x
15.27 = velocity
bl
time
2x = 3 × 108 m/s × 4.04 × 10–3s
12.12 × 105
be C
x= m = 6.06 × 105m = 606 km

2
d 2 = x 2 – h s2 = (606)2 – (600)2 = 7236; d = 85.06 km

o N
x
hs Distance between source and receiver = 2d ≅170 km
dm = 2 2Rh T , 2d = dm, 4d2 = 8 RhT

tt ©
d2 7236
d = hT = ≈ 0.565 km = 565m.
2R 2 × 6400
15.28 From the figure
100 20
Vmax = = 50V, Vmin = = 10 V.
2 2
(i) Percentage modulation

no
Vmax – V min  50 – 10  40
µ (%) = × 100 =   × 100 = × 100 = 66.67%
V max + V min  50 + 10  60
Vmax + Vmin 50 + 10
(ii) Peak carrier voltage = Vc = = = 30V
2 2
2
(iii) Peak information voltage = Vm = µVc = × 30 = 20V .
3
195
15.29 (a) v (t )= A(A m 1 sinωm 1t + Am 2 sin ωm 2 t + Ac sin ωct )
+ B( Am1 sin ωm 1t + Am2 sin ωm 2 t + Ac sin ωct )2
=A (Am sinωm t + Am 2 sin ωm 2 t + Ac sin ωct )

1 1
+ B (( Am1 sin ωm1t + Am 2 t )2 + Ac2 sin2 ωct

+2 Ac ( Am1 sin ωm 1t + Am 2 sin ωct )
d
= A( A1 sin ωm1t + Am 2 sin ωm 2 t + Ac sin ωct )
+ B [ Am 21 sin2 ωm 1t + Am 22 sin 2ωm 2 t + 2 Am1 Am 2 sin ωm1t sin ωm 2 t
he
+ Ac2 sin2 ωct + 2 Ac ( Am1sin ωm1t sin ωct + Am 2 sin ωm 2 + sin ωct ]
pu T
= A( Am sin ωm t + Am sin ωm 2 t + A c sin ωct )
1 1 2
is
+ B [ Am 12 sin 2 ωm t + Am 22 sin 2ωm 2 t + Ac2 sin 2 ωct
re ER
1
2 Am 1 Am 2
bl
+ [cos(ωm 2 – ωm 1 )t – cos(ωm 1 + ωm 2 )t ]
2
2 Ac Am
2
[cos(ωc – ωm 1 )t – cos(ωc + ωm 1 )t ]
be C
+
2
2 Ac Am 1
o N
+ [cos(ωc – ωm 2 )t – cos(ωc + ωm 2 )t ]
2
∴ Frequencies present are

tt ©
ωm1 , ωm 2 ,ωc
(ωm 2 – ωm1 ),(ωm1 + ωm 2 )
(ωc – ωm1 ),(ωc + ωm1 )
(ωc – ωm2 ),(ωc + ωm 2 )
(i) Plot of amplitude versus ω is shown in the Figure.
ωm1 + ωm 2
ωm 2 – ωm1 ωc + ωm1
ωc – ωm1
no
ωm1 ωm 2 ωc – ωm 2 ωc ωc + ωm 2
(ii) As can be seen frequency spectrum is not symmetrical about

ωc. Crowding of spectrum is present for ω < ωc.
196
Answers
(iii) Adding more modulating signals lead to more crowding in ω < ωc

and more chances of mixing of signals.
(iv) Increase band-width and ωc to accommodate more signals. This

shows that large carrier frequency enables to carry more
information (more ωm) and which will in turn increase band-
width.
15.30 fm = 1.5kHz, 1 = 0.7 × 10 –3 s

fm
d
1
fc = 20MHz, = 0.5 × 10 –7 s
fc
he
(i) RC = 103 × 10–8 = 10–5 s
1 1
pu T So,
fc
<< RC <
fm
is satisfied
is
So it can be demodulated.
re ER
(ii) RC = 104 × 10–8 = 10–4 s.
bl Here too
1
fc
<< RC <
1
fm
.
So this too can be demodulated

be C
(iii) RC = 104 × 10–12 = 10–8 s.

o N
1
Here > RC , so this cannot be demodulated.
fc
tt ©
no
197
DESIGN OF QUESTION PAPER

PHYSICS
CLASS XII
Time: Three Hours Max. Marks: 70
The weightage of the distribution of marks over different dimensions of the question paper
shall be as follows:
d
A. Weightage to content/subject units
he
Sl. No. Unit Marks
1. Electrostatics 08
pu T
is
2. Current Electricity 07
re ER
3. Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetism 08
4.
5.
6.
bl
Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current
Optics
08
03
14
be C
7. Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 04

o N
8. Atoms and Nuclei 06

9. Semiconductor Electronics 07
10. Communication Systems 05

tt ©
Total 70
B. Weightage to form of questions
Sl. No. Form of Questions Marks for each No. of Questions Total Marks
Question
1 Long Answer (LA) 5 3 15

no
2 Short Answer SA (I) 3 09 27
3 Short Answer SA (II) 2 10 20
4 Very Short Answer (VSA) 1 08 08
Total – 30 70
198
Sample Question Papers
1Mark quesiton may be Very Short Answer (VSA) type or Multiple Choice Quesition (MCQ)
with only one option correct.
C. Scheme of options
1. There will be no overall option.
2. Internal choices (either or type) on a very selective basis has been given in some
questions.
D. Weightage to difficulty levels of questions
d
Sl. No. Estimated difficulty level Percentage
he
1. Easy 15
2.
pu T
Average 70
is
3. Difficult 15
re ER
bl
be C
o N
tt ©
no
199
CLASS XII
200
PHYSICS
BLUE - PRINT I
Topic VSA (1 mark) SA II (2 marks) SA I (3 Marks) LA (5 marks) Total
no
I Electrostatics 1(1) 4 (2) 3 (1) — 8 (4)
II Current Electricity 1 (1) — 6 (2) — 7 (3)

tt ©
III Magnetic Effect of Current 1 (1) 2 (1) — 5 (1) 8 (3)
and Magnetism
o N
IV Electromagnetic Induction 1(1) 2 (1) — 5 (1) 8 (3)
and Alternating Current
V Electromagnetic Waves 1 (1) 2 (1) — — 3 (2)

be C
VI Optics — — 9 (3) 5 (1) 14 (4)
VII Dual Nature of Radiation — 4 (2) — — 4 (2)

re ER
and Matter
VIII Atoms and Nuclei 1(1) 2 (1) 3 (1) — 6 (3)

pu T
IX Semiconductor Electronics 2 (2) 2 (1) 3 (1) — 7 (4)
X Systems Communication — 2 (1) 3(1) — 5 (2)

bl
Total 8 (8) 20 (10) 27 (9) 15 (3) 70 (30)
is
he
d
SAMPLE PAPER I
XII - PHYSICS
Time : Three Hours Max. Marks : 70
General Instructions
(a) All questions are compulsory.
(b) There are 30 questions in total. Questions 1 to 8 carry one mark each, questions 9 to 18
carry two marks each, questions 19 to 27 carry three marks each and questions 28 to 30
d
carry five marks each.
(c) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in all three
he
questions of five marks each. You have to attempt only one of the given choices in such
questions.
(d) Use of calculators is not permitted.
pu T
is
(e) You may use the following physical constants wherever necessary :
re ER
c = 3 × 108 m s-1
bl
h = 6.6 × 10-34 J s
e = 1.6 × 10-19 C
be C
µo = 4π × 10-7 T m A-1
1 Am 2
o N
= 9 × 109
4πε 0 C2
Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 1023 JK–1

tt ©
Avogadro’s number NA = 6.023 × 1023/mole

Mass of neutron mn = 1.6 × 10–27 kg
1. Two positive charges q2 and q3 fixed along the y axis, exert a net electric force in the + x
direction on a charge q1 fixed along the x axis as shown. If a positive charge Q is added at
(x, 0), the force on q1
y y
q2 q2
no
Q
x x
q1 O q1 O (x, 0)
q3 q3
201
(a) shall increase along the positive x-axis.

(b) shall decrease along the positive x-axis.
(c) shall point along the negative x-axis.
(d) shall increase but the direction changes because of the intersection of Q with q2 and q3.
2. Two batteries of emf ε1 and ε2 (ε2 > ε1) and internal

e1
resistances r1 and r2 respectively are connected r1
in parallel as shown.
d
(a) The equivalent emf εeq of the two cells is between A B
ε1 and ε2, i.e. ε1< εeq < ε2.
he
(b) The equivalent emf εeq is smaller than ε1 . e2 r2
(c) The εeq is given by εeq = ε1 + ε2 always.
(d) εeq is independent of internal resistances r1 and r2.
pu T
is
re ER
3. A proton has spin and magnetic moment just like an electron. Why then its effect is
bl
neglected in magnetism of materials?
4. If a LC circuit is considered analogous to a harmonically oscillating spring-block system,

which energy of the LC circuit would be analogous to potential energy and which one
be C
analogous to kinetic energy?
5. A variable frequency ac source is connected to a capacitor. How will the displacement

o N
current change with decrease in frequency?
6. In pair annihilation, an electron and a positron destroy each other to produce gamma
tt ©
radiation. How is the momentum conserved?
7. Can the potential barrier across a p-n junction be measured by simply connecting a
voltmeter across the junction?
8. The conductivity of a semiconductor increases with increase in temperature because

(a) number density of free current carriers increases.
(b) relaxation time increases.
(c) both number density of carriers and relaxation time increase.
(d) number density of current carriers increases, relaxation time decreases but effect of
no
decrease in relaxation time is much less than increase in number density.
9. Two charges q and –3q are placed fixed on x-axis separated by distance ‘d’. Where should
a third charge 2q be placed such that it will not experience any force?
10. The battery remains connected to a parallel plate capacitor and a dielectric slab is inserted
between the plates. What will be effect on its (i) potential difference, (ii) capacity, (iii) electric
field, and (iv) energy stored?
202
11. Obtain an expression for the magnetic dipole moment of a revolving electron in a Bohr
model.
12. A wire in the form of a tightly wound solenoid is connected to a DC source, and carries a
current. If the coil is stretched so that there are gaps between successive elements of the
spiral coil, will the current increase or decrease? Explain.
13. You are given a 2μF parallel plate capacitor. How would you establish an instantaneous
displacement current of 1mA in the space between its plates?
d
14. There are two sources of light, each emitting with a power of 100 W. One emits X-rays of
he
wavelength 1nm and the other visible light at 500 nm. Find the ratio of number of photons
of X-rays to the photons of visible light of the given wavelength?
15.
pu T
A particle is moving three times as fast as an electron. The ratio of the de Broglie wavelength
is
of the particle to that of the electron is 1.813 × 10–4. Calculate the particle’s mass and
re ER
indentify the particle.
16.
bl
Consider two different hydrogen atoms. The electron in each atom is in an excited state.
Is it possible for the electrons to have different energies but the same orbital angular
momentum according to the Bohr model?
be C
17. What do the terms ‘depletion region’ and ‘barrier potential’ mean for a p-n junction?
o N
18. If the whole earth is to be connected by LOS communication using space waves (no
restriction of antenna size or tower height), what is the minimum number of antennas
required? Calculate the tower height of these antennas in terms of earth’s radius?
tt ©
19. Derive an expression (in vector form) for electric field of a dipole at a point on the equitorial
plane of the dipole. How does the field vary at large distances?
20. What is relaxation time? Derive an expression for resistivity of a wire in terms of member
density of free electrons and relaxation time.
21. First a set of n equal resistors of R each is connected in series to a battery of emf E and
internal resistance R. A current I is observed to flow. Then the n resistors are connected in
parallel to the same battery. It is observed that the current becomes
10 times. What is ‘n’?
no
22. An equiconvex lens (of refractive index 1.50) is placed in contact

with a liquid layer on top of a plane mirror as shown. A small needle
with its tip on the principal axis is moved along the axis until its
inverted image is found at the position of the needle. The distance
of the needle from the lens is measured to be 45.0 cm. The liquid is
removed and the experiment is repeated. The new distance is
measured to be 30.0 cm. What is the refractive index of the liquid?
203
23. Obtain an expression for focal length of a combination of thin lenses in contact.
24. Three immiscible liquids of densities d1 > d2 > d3 and refractive indices μ1 > μ2 > μ3 are put
h
in a beaker. The height of each liquid column is . A dot is made at the bottom of the
3
beaker. For near normal vision, find the apparent depth of the dot.
25. Define ‘half -life’ and ‘average-life’ of a radioactive substance. What is the relation between
the two?
d
26. Using a suitable combination from a NOR, an OR and a NOT gate, draw circuits to obtain
he
the truth tables given below:
A B Y A B Y
pu T
is
0 0 0 0 0 1
re ER
0 1 0 0 1 1
bl 1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
be C
(i) (ii)
27. Define the terms ‘modulation index’ for an AM wave. What would be the modulation index
o N
for an AM wave for which the maximum amplitude is ‘a’ and the minimum amplitude is
‘b’?
tt ©
28. (i) Derive an expression for the magnetic field at a point on the axis of a current carrying
circular loop.
(ii) A coil of 100 turns (tighty bound) and radius 10 cm. carries a current of 1A. What is
the magnitude of the magnetic field at the centre of the coil?
OR
State Ampere’s circuital law. Consider a long straight wire of a circular cross section
(radius a) carrying steady current I. The current I is uniformly distributed across this
cross section. Using Ampere’s circuital law, find the magnetic field in the region r < a and
r > a.
no
29. An ac voltage v = vm sinωt is applied to a series LCR circuit. Obtain the expression for
current in the circuit and the phase angle between current and voltage. What is the
resonance frequency?
OR
An ac voltage v = vm sinωt is applied to a pure inductor L. Obtain an expression for the

current in the circuit. Prove that the average power supplied to an inductor over one
complete cycle is zero.
204
30. (i) State and explain Huygens Principle. Using it, obtain Snell’s law of refraction.
(ii) When light travels from a rarer to a denser medium, the speed decreases. Does the
reduction in speed imply a reduction in the energy carried
by the light wave?
OR
With the help of a labelled ray diagram show the image formation by a compound
microscope. Derive an expression for its magnifying power. How can the magnifying
d
power be increased?
he
pu T
is
re ER
bl
be C
o N
tt ©
no
205
SAMPLE PAPER I
SOLUTIONS AND MARKING SCHEME
1. (a) (1)
2. (a) (1)
eh eh h
3. μp ≈ and μe ≈ ,h = (1/2)
2m p 2m e 2π
d
μe >> μ p because mp >> me. (1/2)
he
4. Magnetic energy analogous to kinetic energy and electrical energy analogous to potential
energy. (1/2), (1/2)
5.
pu T
On decreasing the frequency, reactance X c = 1 will increase which will lead to
is
ωC
re ER
decrease in conduction current. In this case iD = iC; hence displacement current will
decrease. (1/2, 1/2)
6.
7. bl
2γ photons are produced which move in opposite directions to conserve momentum. (1)
No, because the voltmeter must have a resistance very high compared to the junction
be C
resistance, the latter being nearly infinite. (1/2, 1/2)
8. (d) (1)
o N
9. At P: on 2q, Force due to q is to the left and that due to –3q is to the right.
2q 2 6q 2
∴ 4πε x 2 = 4πε (d + x )2
tt ©
(1/2)
0 0
∴ (d + x)2 = 3x2
P q d
∴ 2x2 – 2dx – d2 = 0
2q x –3q
d 3d
x = ± (1/2)
2 2
(Negative sign would be between q and –3q and hence is unaceptable.)

no
d 3d d
x = + = (1 + 3 ) to the left of q. (1)
2 2 2
10. When battery remains connected,
(i) potential difference V remains constant. (1/2)
(ii) capacity C increases. (1/2)
206
(iii) electric field will decrease. (1/2)
(iv) energy stored (1/2)CV2 increases as C increases. (1/2)
11. I = e /T (1/2)
T = 2π r / v (1/2)
μl = IA = I π r 2 = evr /2 (1/2)
d
e
μl = l (1/2)
he
2m e
12. The current will increase. As the wires are pulled apart, the flux will leak through the gaps.
pu T
Lenz’s law demands that induced e.m.f. resist this decrease, which can be done by an
is
increase in current. (1,1)
re ER
dV
13. iD = C (1/2)
dt
bl
1 × 10 –3 = 2 × 10 –6
dV
be C
dt
dV 1
o N
= × 103 = 5 × 102 V/s (1/2)

dt 2
Hence, applying a varying potential difference of 5 × 102 V/s would produce a displacement
current of the desired value. (1)
tt ©
14. Total E is constant. (1/2)

Let n1 and n2 be the number of photons of X-rays and light of visible region:
n1E1 = n2E2 (1/2)
hc hc
n1 = n2
λ1 λ2
n1 λ1
= . (1/2)
n 2 λ2
no
n1 1
= (1/2)
n 2 500
15. de Broglie wavelength of a moving particle, having mass m and velocity v:
λ =h/p=h/mv
Mass, m=h/λv 1/2)
For an electron, mass me = h/λe ve
207
Now, we have v/ve = 3 and λ/λe = 1.813 × 10−4 (1/2)
Then, mass of the particle, m= me (λe/λ) (ve/v) (1/2)
m = (9.11 × 10-31 kg) × (1/3)× (1/1.813 ×10-4)
m =1 × 1.675 × 10-27 kg.
Thus, the particle, with this mass could be a proton or a neutron. (1/2)
13.6
No, because according to Bohr model, En = –
d
16. , (1)
n2
he
and electons having different energies belong to different levels having different values
of n.
pu T
is
nh
So, their angular momenta will be different, as mvr = . (1)
re ER
2π
17.
bl
Definition : depletion region
Definition : barrier potential

(1)
(1)
be C
18. dm2 = 2(R + h T )2 (1/2)

o N
8RhT = 2(R+hT)2 (Q dm = 2 2Rh T )
4Rh T = R 2 + h T 2 + 2Rh T
tt ©
(R – hT)2 = 0
R = hT (1/2)
Since space wave frequency is used, λ << hT, hence only tower height is taken to
consideration. In three diamensions, 6 antenna towers of hT = R would do. (1)
19. Derivation (2)
At large distances, E ∝ 1/r3 (1)
20. Definition and Derivation (3)

no
21. I = E/(R+nR) (1)
10I = E/(R+R/n) (1)
(1+n)/(1+1/n) = 10 = {(1+n)/(n+1)}n = n, n = 10. (1)
22. μ = 1.5. 45cm is focal length of the combination of convex lens and plano convex liquid
208
lens. When liquid is removed, f 1= 30 cm is the focal length of convex lens only. If f2 is the
focal length of plano-convex liquid lens,
1 1 1
+ = (1/2)
f1 f 2 f
1 1 1 1 1 −1
= − = − = , f 2 = −90 cm (1/2)
f2 f f 1 45 30 90
d
Using lens maker’s formula, R1=R, R2=–R
he
1 ⎛ 1 1 ⎞ 1 ⎛1 1⎞
= ( μ − 1) ⎜ − ⎟⇒ = (1.5 − 1 ) ⎜ + ⎟ ⇒ R = 30 cm (1/2,1/2)
f2 ⎝ 1
R R 2 ⎠ 30 ⎝ R R ⎠
pu T
is
For plano-convex lens
re ER
1 ⎛ 1 1 ⎞
bl
= ( μ − 1) ⎜ − ⎟ (1/2)
f2 ⎝ R1 R2 ⎠
1 ⎛1 1 ⎞ μ −1
be C
− = ( μ − 1) ⎜ − ⎟=
90 ⎝ ∞ 30 ⎠ −30
o N
μ = 1.33 (1/2)
1 1 1
23. Derivation, = + + ... (3)
tt ©
f f1 f 2
24. Let the apparent depth be O1 for the object seen from μ2 then
μ2 h
O1 = (1)
μ1 3
If seen from μ 3, the apparent depth is O2
μ3 ⎛ h ⎞ μ3 ⎛ h + μ2 h ⎞ h ⎛ μ 3 + μ3 ⎞ m3
O2 = ⎜ + O1 ⎟ = ⎜ ⎟= ⎜ ⎟ h/3 (1)
μ2 ⎝ 3 ⎠ μ2 ⎝ 3 μ1 3 ⎠ 3 ⎝ μ2 μ1 ⎠ O3
no
Seen from outside, the apparent height is

h/3 m2 O2
1 ⎛h ⎞ 1 ⎡ h h ⎛ μ3 μ3 ⎞ ⎤
O3 = ⎜ +O2 ⎟ = μ ⎢ 3 + 3 ⎜ μ + μ ⎟ ⎥
μ3 ⎝ 3 ⎠ 3 ⎣ ⎝ 2 1 ⎠⎦ h/3 m1
O1
h⎛1 1 1 ⎞ O
= ⎜ + + ⎟ (1)
3 ⎝ μ1 μ2 μ3 ⎠
209
25. Definition and expression: Half Life (1/2,1/2)
Definition and expression: Average life (1/2,1/2)
Relation between the two. (1)
26. Output not symmetric for A, B = (0,1) and (1,0). NOT gate in one input. (1)
(i) has three zero. NOR gate.

4mF
10W
Thus (1)
d
2.5V
2W
he
(ii) has three ones. OR gate.
A
Thus Y (1)
B
pu T
is
re ER
27. μ = Am/Ac (1)
a = Ac + Am
b = Ac - Am
bl (1/2)
be C
Ac = (a + b)/2, Am = (a–b)/2 (1/2)
μ = (a - b)/(a+b) (1)
o N
28. (i) Derivation (3)
(ii) Since the coil is tighty bound, we may take each circular element to have the same
tt ©
radius R = 10cm = 0.1m. N=100. The magnitude of the magnetic field is
B = μ0N I/(2 R) = 4π×10-7×10-2× 1/(2 ×10−1) = 2π×10-4 = 6.28 × 10–4 T. (2)
OR
Statement of Ampere’s law (1)
Derivation of B = μ0 I/2πr, for r > a (2)
Derivation of B = (μ0 I/2πa2) r, for r < a (2)
29. Derivation (4)

no
Resonance frequency (1)
OR
Derivation (3)
Proof (2)
30. (i) Statement and explanation (1)
210
Derivation of Snell’s law (3)
(ii) No. Energy carried by a wave depends on the amplitude of the wave, not on the
speed of wave propagation. (1)
OR
(iii) Labelled ray diagram (1)
L ⎛ D ⎞
Derivation m = ⎜1 + ⎟ (2)
fo ⎝ fe ⎠
d
To Increase magnifying power, the objective and eyepice should have small focal
lengths. In practice, it is difficult ot make the focal length much smaller than 1 cm.
he
Also large lenses are required to make L large. (1)
pu T
is
re ER
bl
be C
o N
tt ©
no
211
212
CLASS XII
PHYSICS
BLUE - PRINT II
Topic VSA (1 mark) SA II (2 marks) SA I (3 Marks) LA (5 marks) Total
no
I Electrostatics 1(1) 2 (1) — 5 (1) 8 (3)
II Current Electricity — 4 (2) 3 (1) — 7 (3)

tt ©
III Magnetic Effect of Current 1 (1) 4 (2) 3 (1) — 8 (4)
and Magnetism
o N
IV Electromagnetic Induction 1(1) 2 (1) — 5 (1) 8 (3)
and Alternating Current
be C
V Electromagnetic Waves 1 (1) 2 (1) — — 3 (2)
VI Optics 2 (2) 4 (2) 3 (1) 5 (1) 14 (6)

re ER
VII Dual Nature of Radiation 1 (1) — 3 (1) — 4 (2)
and Matter
VIII Atoms and Nuclei — — 6 (2) — 6 (2)

pu T
IX Semiconductor Electronics 1 (1) — 6 (2) — 7 (3)
X Communication Systems — 2 (1) 3(1) — 5 (2)

bl
Total 8 (8) 20 (10) 27 (9) 15 (3) 70 (30)
is
he
d
SAMPLE PAPER II
XII - PHYSICS
Time : Three Hours Max. Marks : 70
General Instructions
(a) All questions are compulsory.
(b) There are 30 questions in total. Questions 1 to 8 carry one mark each, questions 9 to 18
d
carry two marks each, questions 19 to 27 carry three marks each and questions 28 to 30
carry five marks each.
he
(c) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in all three
questions of five marks each. You have to attempt only one of the given choices in such
questions.
pu T
is
(d) Use of calculators is not permitted.
re ER
(e) You may use the following physical constants wherever necessary :
c = 3 × 108ms-1
h = 6.6 × 10-34Jsbl
be C
e = 1.6 × 10-19 C
µo = 4π × 10-7 T m A-1
o N
1 Am 2
= 9 × 109
4πε 0 C2
tt ©
Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 1023 JK-1

Avogadro’s number NA = 6.023 × 1023/mole
Mass of neutron mn = 1.6 × 10-27 kg
1. A capacitor of 4 μ F is connected in a circuit as shown. The internal resistance of the

battery is 0.5 Ω . The amount of charge on the capacitor plates will be
(a) 0
4μC
no
(b) 4mF
(c) 16 μ C
10W
(d) 8μC
2.5V
2W
213
2. Two charged particles traverse identical helical paths in a completely opposite sense in a
uniform magnetic field B = B0 k̂ .
(a) They have equal z-components of momenta.

(b) They must have equal charges.
(c) They necessarily represent a particle-antiparticle pair.
⎛e ⎞ ⎛e ⎞
(d) The charge to mass ratio satisfy : ⎜⎝ m ⎟⎠ + ⎜⎝ m ⎟⎠ = 0 .
d
1 2
3. A solenoid is connected to a battery so that a steady current flows through it. If an iron
he
core is inserted into the solenoid, will the current increase or decrease? Explain.
4. Professor C.V Raman surprised his students by suspending freely a tiny light ball in a
pu T
transparent vacuum chamber by shining a laser beam on it. Which property of EM waves
is
was he exhibiting? Give one more example of this property.
re ER
bl
5. A passenger in an aeroplane shall
(a) never see a rainbow.
(b) may see a primary and a secondary rainbow as concentric circles.
be C
(c) may see a primary and a secondary rainbow as concentric arcs.

(d) shall never see a secondary rainbow.
o N
6. What is the shape of the wavefront on earth for sunlight?
7. An electron (mass m ) with an initial velocity v = v 0 î (v 0 > 0) is in an electric field

tt ©
E = – E 0î(E 0 = constant > 0 ) . It’s de Broglie wavelength at time t is given by
λ0
(a)
⎛ eE 0 t ⎞
⎜1 + m v ⎟
⎝ 0 ⎠
⎛ eE 0t ⎞
(b) λ0 ⎜1 + mv ⎟
⎝ 0 ⎠
(c) λ0 Aq
(d) λ0t.
no
8. Explain why elemental semiconductors cannot be used to make E B

q q
visible LED’s. O
9. Five charges, q each are placed at the corners of a regular pentagon

r
of side ‘a’ as shown.
Dq qC
a
214
(i) What will be the electric field at O if the charge from one of the corners (say A) is
removed?
(ii) What will be the electric field at O if the charge q at A is replaced by –q ?
10. Two cells of emf E1 and E2 have internal resistance r1 and r2. Deduce an expression for
equivalent emf of their parallel combination.
11. Draw a circut diagram of a potential divider using a cell and a rheostat. Also mark the
output terminals.
d
12. If magnetic monopoles existed, how would the Gauss’s law of magnetism be modified?
he
13. From molecular viewpoint, discuss the temperature dependence of susceptibility for
diamagnetism, paramagnetism and ferromagnetism.
pu T
is
14. A lamp is connected in series with a capacitor. Predict your observations for dc and ac
re ER
connections. What happens in each case if the capacitance of the capacitor is reduced?
15.
bl
A plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 25 MHz travels in free space along the
x-direction. At a particular point in space and time. E = 6.3 $j V/m. What is B at this
be C
point?
16. Define power of a lens. Show that it is inversaly proportional to the focal length of the lens.
o N
17. Two slits are made one millimetre apart and the screen is placed one metre away. What is
the fringe separation when blue-green light of wavelength 500 nm is used?
tt ©
18. A message signal of frequency 10 kHz and peak voltage of 10 volts is used to modulate a
carrier of frequency 1 MHz and peak voltage of 20 volts. Determine (a) modulation index,
and (b) the side bands produced.
19. Draw a curcuit for determining internal resistance of a cell using a potentiometer. Explain
the principle on which this method is based.
20. What do you mean by diamagnetism, paramagnetism and ferromagnetism?
21. For the same objective, find the ratio of the least separation between two points to be
no
o
distinguished by a microscope for light of 5000 A and electrons accelerated through 100V
used as the illuminating substance.
22. Monochromatic light of frequency 6.0 × 1014 Hz is produced by a laser. The power emitted
is 2.0 × 10–3 W. (i) What is the energy of a photon in the light beam? (ii) How many
photons per second, on an average, are emitted by the source?
215
23. State Bohr’s postulate for the ‘permitted orbits’ for electrons in a hydrogen atom. How
this postulate was explained by de Broglie?
24. Explain a beta decay process with an example. Tritium has a half life of 12.5y undergoing
beta decay. What fraction of a sample of pure tritium will remain undecayed after 25 y?
25. What is rectification? With the help of a labelled circuit diagram, explain full wave
rectification using junction diode.
d
26. Explain briefly, with the help of a circuit diagram, how V-I characteristics of a p-n junction
diode are obtained in (i) forward bias, and (ii) reverse bias. Draw the shapes of the curves
he
obtained.
27. (i) Draw a block diagram of a communication system.
pu T
is
(ii) What is meant by ‘detection’ of amplitude modulated wave? Describe briefly the
re ER
essential steps for detection.
28.
bl
Derive an expression for potential due to a dipole for distances large compared to the size
of the dipole. How is the potential due to a dipole different from that due to a single
charge?
be C
OR
Obtain an expression for potential energy of a system of two charges in an external field.
o N
A system consisting of two chargs 7μ C and –2 μC are placed at (-9 cm, 0,0) and
(9 cm,0,0) respectively in an external electric field E = A (1/r2) where A = 9 × 105 C m2.
tt ©
Calulate the potential energy of this system.
29. Define ‘self inductance’ of a coil. Obtain an expnession for self inductance of a long solenoid
of cross sectional area A, length l having n turns for unit length. Prove that self inductance
is the analogue of mass in mechanics.
OR
Define ‘mutual inductance’ of to coil. On what factors it depends?
Two concentric circular coils, one of small radius r1 and the other of large radius r2, such
that r1 << r2, are placed co-axially with centres coinciding. Obtain the mutual inductance
no
of the arrangement.
30. Draw a ray diagram to show two refraction of light through a glass prism. Explain with
help of a diagram the dependence of angle of deviation on the angle of incidence. Hence
obtain the relation for the angle of minimum deviation in terms of angle of prism and
refractive index of prism.
OR
216
(i) Using the relation for refraction at a single spherical refracting surface, derive the lens
maker’s formula.
(ii) Double convex lenses are to be manufactured from a glass of refraction index 1.55
with both faces of the same radius of curvature. What is the radius of curvature required
if the focal length is to be 20.0 cm?
d
he
pu T
is
re ER
bl
be C
o N
tt ©
no
217
SAMPLE PAPER II
SOLUTIONS AND MARKING SCHEME
01. (a) (1)
02. (d) (1)
03. The current will decrease. As the iron core is inserted in the solenoid, the magnetic field
increases and the flux increases. Lent’s law implies that induced e.m.f. should resist this
increase, which can be achieved by a decrease in current. (1)
d
04. EM waves exert radiation pressure. Tails of comets are due to solar solar
radiation. (1/2, 1/2)
he
05. (b) (1)
06.
pu T
Spherical with huge radius as compared to the earth’s radius so that it is almost
is
a plane. (1/2, 1/2)
re ER
07. (a) (1)
08.
bl
Elemental semiconductor’s band-gap is such that emissions are in infra-red
region. (1/2, 1/2)
be C
1 q
09. (i) along OA (1)
4πε 0 r 2
o N
1 2q
(ii) along OA (1)
4πε 0 r 2
tt ©
10. I = I1 + I 2 (1/2)
E1 − V E 2 − V
= +
r1 r2
⎛E E ⎞ ⎛1 1 ⎞
I = ⎜ 1 + 2 ⎟−V ⎜ + ⎟
⎝ r1 r2 ⎠ ⎝ r1 r2 ⎠
E1r2 + E2r1 ⎛r +r ⎞
V = −I⎜ 1 2 ⎟
no
r1 + r2 (1/2)
⎝ r1 + r2 ⎠
Comparing with V = Eeq – Ireq (1/2)
E1r2 + E 2r1
We get, Eeq = (1/2)
r1 + r2
218
11. Figure shows the desired circuit. The output volage is obtained across. A and C. (1,1)
C
A
R
E r
d
12. Gauss’s law of magnetism states that the flux of B through any closed surface is always
he
zero, ∫ B.d s = 0 (1)
If monopole existed, the right hand side would be equal to monopole (magnetic
pu T
charge, qm ) multiplied by μo.
is
re ER
∫ B. d s = μ q m . (1)
13.
bl
Diamagnetism is due to orbital motion of electrons developing magnetic moments opposite
to applied field and hence is not much affected by temperature.
Paramagnetism and ferromagnetism is due to alignments of atomic magnetic moments in
(1)
be C
the direction of the applied field. As temperature increases, this aligment is disturbed and
hence susceptibilities of both decrease as temperature increases. (1)
o N
14. When a dc source is connected to a capacitor, the capacitor gets charged and after charging
no current flows in the circuit and the lamp will not glow. There will be no change even if C
is reduced. (1)
tt ©
With ac source, the capacitor offers capacitative reactance (1/ωC) and the current flows in
the circuit. Consquently, the lamp will shine. Reducing C will increase reactance and the
lamp will shine less brightly than before. (1)
15. The magnitude of B is
E
B=
c
6.3V / m
= = 2.1 × 10 –8 T
3 × 10 m / s
8
no
(1)
To find the direction, we note that E is along y-direction and the wave propagated along
x-axis. Therefore, B should be in a direction perpendicular to both x-, and y-axes. Using
vector algebra, E × B should be along x-direction. Since, (+ $j ) × (+ k )= $i , B is along the
z-direction.
×10–8 k T.
Thus, B= 2.1× (1 )
219
16. P = tan δ with diagram (1)
1
=h/ f =
f
For small δ, tan δ ∼ δ. P = 1/f (1)
Dλ
17. Fringe spacing = (1)
d
d
1 × 5 × 10 –7
he
(1)
= 0.5mm
1 × 10 –3
18. Modulation index = 10/20 = 0.5 (1)
pu T
is
Side bands are at 1010 kHz and 990 kHz. (1)
re ER
19. Diagram (1)
E = φ l1
V = φ l2 bl E/V = l1/l2
(1/2)
(1/2)
be C
E = I (r+R), V= IR
o N
E/V = (r+ R)/R (1/2)

r = R {(l1/l2)-1}. (1/2)
20. Diamgnetism (1)
tt ©
Paramagnetism (1)
Ferromagnetism (1)
1.22λ
21. d min = (1/2)
2 sin β
where β is the angle subtended by the objective at the object.
o
For light of 5500 A
no
1.22 × 5.5 × 10 –7
d min = m (1)
2 sin β
For electrons accelerated through 100V, the deBroglie wavelength is
220
h 1.227
λ= = = 0.13nm = 0.13 × 10 –9 m (1/2)
p 100
1.22 × 1.3 × 10 –10 (1/2)

∴ d 'min =
2 sin β
d min
'
= 0.2 × 10 –3 (1/2)
d min
d
22. (i) Each photon has an energy
he
E = hv = (6.63 × 10–34 J s) (6.0 × 10–14 Hz)
= 3.98 × 10–19 J (1)
pu T
is
(ii) If N is the number of photons emitted by the source per second, the power P transmitted
re ER
in the beam equals N times the energy per photon E, so that P = NE. Then
N =
P
E bl (1)
be C
2.0 × 10−3 W = 5.0 × 1015 photons per second. (1)

=
3.98 × 10−19 J
o N
23. Postutate (1)

de Broglie explanation (2)
tt ©
24. Explanation (1)

Example (1)
Answer : 1/4 of sample (1)
25. Rectification (1/2)
Labelled diagram (1/2)
Explanation (2)
no
26. Circuit diagram for obtaining characteristic curves (1)

Explanation (1)
221
Shape of corves (1)

27. (i) Block diagram of communication system (1)
(ii) Block diagram of a detector (1)
Explanation (1)
28. Derivation (4)
Difference (1)
d
OR
he
Derivation (3)
Numerical (2)
29. Definition
pu T (1)
is
re ER
Derivation of expression (2)
Proof
bl OR
(2)
be C
Definition of mutual inductance (1)

Dependence on factors (1)
o N
Numerical (3)
30. Labelled diagram (1)
tt ©
Diagram of δ versus e (1)

Derivation δm = (μ-1)A (3)
OR
(i) Derivation (3)
(ii) μ = 1.55, R1 = R (1/2)
R2 = –R, f = 20 cm.
⎛ 1 1 ⎞
no
1
= ( μ − 1) ⎜ − ⎟ (1/2)
f ⎝ R1 R2 ⎠
1 ⎛ 1 1 ⎞ 1.10
= (1.55 − 1) ⎜ + ⎟= (1/2)
20 ⎝ R1 R2 ⎠ R
R=20×1.1 = 22 cm. (1/2)
222

Class 12 - Physics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Class 12 - Physics

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Class 12 - Physics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter One

(a) shall increase along the positive x-axis.

1.3 The Electric flux through the surface

(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

(a) The dipole will not experience any force.

(d) The dipole will experience a force upwards.

isolated conducting plane. The field at a point P on the

(a) perpendicular to the diameter

pu T (c) discontinuous only if there is a negative charge at that point.

(a) ∫ s E.dS ≠ 0 on any surface.

(b) if the charge is outside the surface.

(c) ∫ s E.dS could not be defined.

(c) the dominant electric field is ∝ 1 , for large r, where r is the

1.12 Refer to the arrangement of charges in Fig. 1.6 and a Gaussian

(c) flux through the surface of sphere due to 5Q is zero.

1.16 The dimensions of an atom are of the order of an Angstrom. Thus

bl 1.21 Consider a coin of Example 1.20. It is electrically neutral and

concentrated in two point charges seperated by (i) 1 cm

conclude from these results?

(iii) What will be the electric field at O if the charge q at A is

on the proton be: ep = – (1 + y)e where e is the electronic charge.

1.27 Consider a sphere of radius R with charge density distributed as

d (b) Find the charges on β and γ after the collision.

which is now taken to be exactly given by c = 2.99792458 × 108

(ii) Write 1 esu of charge = x C, where x is a dimensionless number.

oscillation of time period. Fig. 1.14

1.31 Total charge –Q is uniformly spread along length of a ring of

radius R. A small test charge +q of mass m is kept at the centre

(a) Show that the particle executes a simple harmonic oscillation.

2.1 A capacitor of 4 μ F is connected as shown in the circuit (Fig. 2.1).

electric field. The electric potential energy of the charge

2.3 Figure 2.2 shows some equipotential lines distributed in space.

(b) The work done in Fig. (ii) is least.

sphere is 100V. Two statments are made in this regard:

2.5 Equipotentials at a great distance from a collection of charges whose

2.6 A parallel plate capacitor is made of two dielectric blocks in series.

pu T (a) in all space.

of lower electric fields.

(c) will be more crowded near regions of large charge densities.

(b) the electric field is zero

K2 is open. Then K1 is opened and K2 is closed (order is important).

If a conductor has a potential V ≠ 0 and there are no charges

(a) there must be charges on the surface or inside itself.

(c) there must be charges only on the surface.

2.13 A parallel plate capacitor is connected to a battery as shown in

(c) In A : V remains same and hence Q changes. Fig. 2.5

smaller sphere is more or less than that of the larger one.

2.15 Do free electrons travel to region of higher potential or lower

2.16 Can there be a potential difference between two adjacent

2.17 Can the potential function have a maximum or minimum in free

work done compare in the two cases?

bl 2.19 Prove that a closed equipotential surface with no charge within

then the dielectric is removed. State whether the capacitance, the

2.21 Prove that, if an insulated, uncharged conductor is placed near a

2.22 Calculate potential energy of a point charge –q placed along the

2.23 Calculate potential on the axis of a ring due to charge Q uniformly

2.25 Two point charges of magnitude +q and -q are placed at

2.26 A parallel plate capacitor is filled by a dielectric whose relative